JP7115594B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines , shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. In such a game machine, whether or not to shift to a winning state is determined based on information stored in a predetermined range of the storage means .

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-276365

However, in such a gaming machine, if an erroneous value is defined in the control program due to a mistake made by the program designer, etc., the gaming machine may malfunction .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing malfunctions .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, and a plurality of addresses capable of storing data, and the control means performs control. storage means for storing a plurality of data groups composed of one or a plurality of data for the control means; and an address specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined address included in an address range in which at least a specific data group is stored among the plurality of data groups. wherein the storage means stores first regulation information defined in association with the predetermined address, and data number information indicating the number of at least a part of the data constituting the specific data group. and second definition information defined in association with each other; The data group setting means identifies the predetermined address included in the is used to set the number of data indicated by the data number information among the data constituting the one data group to be used for the predetermined control , and at least the specific data group is continuous data used for the predetermined control are stored for each of a plurality of addresses to be used for the data group setting means, and the data group setting means stores the data of the number indicated by the data number information. The configuration is such that data stored in a specific number of consecutive addresses are set to be used for the predetermined control .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the controller comprises control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, and a plurality of addresses capable of storing data, and the control means controls one or more addresses. and a storage means storing a plurality of data groups constituted by the data of the storage means, and data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the storage means is subjected to predetermined control by the control means. data group setting means for setting to be used; and address specifying means for specifying a predetermined address included in an address range in which at least a specific data group is stored among the plurality of data groups. , the storage means defines first definition information defined in association with the predetermined address, and data number information indicating the number of at least a part of data constituting the specific data group in correspondence with each other; and second stipulation information, and the address specifying means uses the first stipulation information to store the predetermined data group included in the range of addresses in which the specified data group is stored. The data group setting means uses the predetermined address specified by the address specifying means and the data number information specified using the second specifying information to specify the The configuration is such that, of the data constituting one data group, the number of data indicated by the data number information is set so as to be used for the predetermined control , and at least the specific data group consists of a plurality of consecutive addresses. Data used for the predetermined control are stored for each of the data group setting means, and the data group setting means stores a specific number of consecutive data indicated by the data number information as data for the number indicated by the data number information. The configuration is such that the data stored in the address is set to be used for the predetermined control .

Thereby, there is an effect that malfunction of the game machine can be suppressed .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C3 and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a win setting table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the selection table for special figure 1, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the selection table for special figure 2. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an offset setting table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a game result setting table; FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a state setting table, and FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the description contents of the state setting table in an actual program; It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the clear table at the end of the jackpot. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of various setting value storage areas; 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a register; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface C. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit determination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of a big hit performed by MPU in a main control unit. 10 is a flow chart showing game result set value acquisition processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of failure performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flow chart showing zero setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. 4 is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing back image variation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table for low probability in the modification of the first embodiment, (b) is a high probability in the modification of the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random-number table for the time 1st hit. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of description contents of a first winning random number table in an actual program in a modified example of the first embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU of the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process 2 performed by MPU of the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the offset setting table of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit determination processing performed by MPU of the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process 2 at the time of failure performed by MPU of the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is the first winning type counter C2 in the third embodiment and the jackpot in the special symbol It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with a classification. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation type selection table in the third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the selection table for the incubation period in the third embodiment, and (b) and (c) are the contents of the selection table for the promotion period in the third embodiment. It is the figure shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a promotion period selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) and (c) are the promotion period end selection table in the third embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an offset setting table in the third embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a selection table for when out of alignment in the third embodiment; (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a case in which rank-up is failed in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a case of rank-up from rank D to rank C in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the big win in the third embodiment. (a) is a rank-up effect that is executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and is an explanatory diagram illustrating the case of rank-up from rank C to rank B, and (b) in the third embodiment FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case of rank-up from rank B to rank A in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case of upgrading from rank A to rank S in a rank-up effect executed after the end of a big win in the third embodiment; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the case of notifying that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank within the rank-up period in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case of informing that the player could not be ranked up to the maximum rank within the rank-up period in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit determination processing performed by MPU of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process 2 at the time of a big hit performed by MPU of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process 3 at the time of failure performed by MPU of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation type selection table in the modification of the third embodiment, (b) is a non-probable variation per selection table in the modification of the third embodiment It is a schematic diagram showing the contents schematically, (c) is a diagram showing schematically the contents of the selection table for probability variation hit in the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a selection table for when out of the variation of the third embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit determination process performed by MPU of the main control unit in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process 4 at the time of failure performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed accompanying the entry of a ball into a first ball entrance 64a or a second ball entrance 64b (start winning), which will be described later, are themes given to each stage. It is designed to be done according to The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Island stage”→“City stage”→…. Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to the "town stage".

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64a, a second ball entrance 64b, a variable prize winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64a, the second ball-entering hole 64b, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67. When it does, the lottery of the normal design (second design) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, it is judged whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ), and the opening is repeated multiple times. As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot type of the special pattern, four types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot D" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game in accordance with these jackpot types (game value) is given to the player. Although the details will be described later, for example, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", after the jackpot ends, the game value that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times. , when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", a game value is imparted such that a shift to a high-probability state of special symbols occurs after the jackpot ends.

Also, when the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds to 30 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Incidentally, the specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry opening 64a. Therefore, during the special game state, since the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, many balls enter the first ball entering hole 64a. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64a becomes maximum (4 times).

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 64b. become a state. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 64b, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, four types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot D" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols.

When the "normal jackpot" is achieved, a special game state with 16 rounds (16-round jackpot) is entered, but no added value is provided after the jackpot is completed. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the game shifts to the special symbol low probability state, and does not shift to the "ordinary symbol time saving state" (ordinary symbol time saving state).

When it becomes "jackpot A (time reduction jackpot)", the number of rounds becomes a special game state (8 rounds jackpot), and after that, as an added value after the jackpot, "normal pattern time reduction state" (normal pattern time reduction medium ). Specifically, the winning probability of normal symbols is increased from the end of the big win until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times. In the present embodiment, the period during which the time-saving state of normal symbols continues is defined by the number of lotteries of special symbols.

In addition, if you win "jackpot B (variable probability)", "jackpot C (latency probability variation)", or "jackpot D (rare latency probability variation jackpot)", the number of rounds is a special game state with 8 rounds (8 rounds After that, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, it shifts to a “high probability state of special symbols”. In addition, when the "jackpot B (probable variable jackpot)" is won, the player is notified that the transition to the "high probability state of special symbols" has occurred, but the "jackpot C (latency variable jackpot)", Alternatively, the notification is not performed in the "jackpot D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)". Therefore, even if the transition to the "high probability state of special symbols" is not notified, the player is notified of "jackpot C (latency probability variable jackpot)" or "jackpot D (rare latency probability variable jackpot)". can be expected to have been elected to That is, it is possible to expect that it is in a "high probability state of special symbols".

In addition, if you win the "jackpot C (latent probability variable jackpot)", the content of the variable effect selected when the jackpot is announced, and the special design after the jackpot is announced. The display contents of the fluctuation pattern production are the same as "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)". In other words, it is configured to make it difficult to determine whether the "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)" or the "jackpot C (latency variable jackpot)" is won. On the other hand, if you win the "jackpot D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)", you will be notified of the jackpot compared to when you win the "jackpot A (shorter time jackpot)" or "jackpot B (latency probability variable jackpot)". It is configured to facilitate the selection of highly expected variation pattern performance when the special symbol is notified when the game is over or after the end of the big win. Therefore, even if it is not notified that the transition to the "special symbol high probability state" has been made, by selecting the highly expected variation pattern production, the "jackpot D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)" It is possible to make the player expect that he/she has won the lottery, and improve the player's interest in the game.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, the so-called special symbol high probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (jackpot ). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "ordinary symbol time saving state" (ordinary symbol time saving state) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal pattern", it is called "normal state of normal pattern", which means that the probability of hitting the normal pattern is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

After that, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns after the special pattern jackpot ends, that is, the period from the end of the ``jackpot A'' to the end of 100 special pattern lotteries. is called a short period of time of the normal design. Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbols is increased even during the probability variation of the special symbols. As mentioned above, in the case of "jackpot A", the increase in the probability of winning the normal pattern was limited to the end of the lottery of the special pattern 100 times, but when the transition to the high probability state of the special pattern , the winning probability of normal symbols is maintained in an increased state until the next big win is won. That is, when "jackpot B" to "jackpot D" are won, the player can wait for the next jackpot without reducing the number of balls in his possession, which is advantageous for the player. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various game states such as a jackpot state, a time-saving state with normal symbols, and a probability-variable state with special symbols, thereby improving the interest of the player. there is

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "jackpot A" is won, the period of time for normal symbols is set to 100 times, but it is not limited to this. For example, 20 times or 150 times may be selected as the normal symbol time period. Also, instead of the number of lotteries for special symbols, the time-saving state of normal symbols may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses. In addition, instead of setting the "time saving state of the normal pattern", the time to open the electric role (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b is increased, or the electric role is played in one normal pattern. The number of times the object is released may be increased. In addition, the number of rounds and the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not limited to the aspects of the present embodiment. As closing conditions for the winning opening (large open opening) 65a, for example, a condition of "until 3 seconds have passed or 10 balls have won" or "until 10 seconds have passed or 5 balls have won" You may provide a jackpot with the condition of "until you do." In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, it is configured to shift to one of the "special symbol high probability state" or "ordinary symbol working time reduction state", but the jackpot ends. After the lottery of special symbols is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), it is always configured to be in a ``high probability state of special symbols'', and after the lottery of special symbols is completed for a predetermined number of times, It may be configured so as to shift to the "low probability state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" or "normal state of normal symbols".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state when the big win is won, the added value given to the player after the end of the big win is common. The added value given to each person may be different. For example, if "jackpot A" is won during the time saving state of the normal design, the short time period of the normal design is set to 100 times, and if the "jackpot A" is won during the normal state of the normal design, the time reduction of the normal design The period may be 50 times.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not a lottery for a special symbol is being executed accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning). By performing a variable display, as a stop pattern after the end of the fluctuation, a special pattern (first pattern) according to the lottery result of the special pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the first entrance 64a, or the second entrance The lighting state indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls that entered the mouth 64b.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b while the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the entrance. The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be configured such that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a and the ball entering the second ball entrance 64b are suspended up to four times respectively. In addition, when the change is executed according to the held ball, the change may be executed in the order in which the ball is entered without considering the type of the ball entrance. A ball may be preferentially entered into the ball entrance 64b. In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot or the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be changed between the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 64b.

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the jackpot type ("jackpot A" to "jackpot D" in the case of a jackpot). ), a special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, and FIG. 4(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is one of "jackpot A", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D", the main pattern to which the even number "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is added. are displayed. Further, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the jackpot type only by confirming the aligned main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/5 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of pending balls.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This secondary display area Ds displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b. be.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball enters The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and is also indicated in the sub-display area Ds. In the sub-display area Ds, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the secondary display area Ds, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four areas may differ by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed with the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 64b operates for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in a state (opened) so that a ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 64b. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

Incidentally, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, as in the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 64b. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64a through which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the first ball inlet 64a, the first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64a is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

Below the first ball entrance 64a, a second ball entrance 64b through which a ball can enter is provided. When the ball enters the second ball inlet 64b, a second ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. Further, the second ball entrance 64b is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, similarly to the first ball entrance 64a. Since the upper side of the second ball entrance 64b is blocked by the first ball entrance 64a, it is difficult for a ball to enter normally. As described above, when the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened, and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 64b. In other words, it is constructed so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 64b during the probability change of the special symbol which is likely to hit the normal symbol or during the short period of the normal symbol.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the second ball entrance 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have been won, or until 0.5 seconds have passed, or until a ball will be released until 10 prizes are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated the number of times according to the type of the jackpot. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the front lower side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the direction in which the balls fall, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box may be damaged. The cover side is cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203, a register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 and writing various data to the RAM 203, and an interrupt circuit. , a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main controller 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, the processing of the main controller 110 includes the lottery for the special symbol, the lottery for the normal symbol, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display. This is the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of the display on the device 81 .

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A first winning type counter C2 used for , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C3 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C3. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering 64a or the second ball entrance 64b. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C3 is stored in time with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 249). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 249, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 249. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 35).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, which will be described later. When the value of the counter C1 coincides with the value of the random number set by the first winning random number table 202a as a big win, it is determined as a special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of a special symbol being a jackpot is higher than when the probability is low (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a1 (not shown) for special symbol low probability and the first winning random number table 202a2 (not shown) for special symbol high probability are It is provided in the ROM 202 .

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 199). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 199 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 199). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 249. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become a big hit with special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in the winning random number table 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 3 among the total number of random number values of 300, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 30 random numbers that are special symbol jackpots. 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249" is the first random number table for high probability 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 30 out of the total number of random numbers of 300, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit is "1/10".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random numbers for the big win stored in the first winning random number table 202a for the low probability and the random numbers for the big winning stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability A random number is set for each jackpot so that there are no duplicate values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the random value for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. It's likely to get easier. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-199. Then, as shown in FIG. 7(b), in the first winning type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 99" is "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)". In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "100 to 179" is "jackpot B (probability variable jackpot)", and the jackpot type when the value is "180 to 194" is "jackpot C (latent probability variable Jackpot)”, and the jackpot type when the value is “195 to 199” is “jackpot D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that one of the four types of winning (jackpot A to jackpot D) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. there is

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). By the fluctuation type counter CS1, for example, "completely out" where reach does not occur, "short reach" with a relatively short fluctuation time, "long reach" with a relatively long fluctuation time, "super reach" with the longest fluctuation time, etc. A rough display mode is determined. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined. be. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type data for determining the variation time of the pattern variation are associated with each other in the variation type selection table 202d (Fig. 8(a)). This variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Although the details will be described later, the variation type selection table 202d includes a table (winning selection table 202d1) that is referred to when the jackpot is won, and a table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery is lost. is provided. Furthermore, there are two types of tables that are referred to when the special symbol lottery is lost. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a and the special symbol lottery is lost, the table (selection table 202d2 for special figure 1 loss) and the ball are the second ball A table (selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 loss) to be referred to when the ball enters the mouth 64b and the special symbol lottery is lost is provided. Also, compared to the case of selecting the variation type data from the selection table 202d2 for the special figure 1 deviation, when selecting the variation type data from the selection table 202d3 for the special figure 2 deviation, the variation type data corresponding to the complete deviation The selection rate is set high. By configuring in this way, during the probability change of the special pattern which is a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 64b, and during the time saving state of the normal pattern, when the special pattern is lost in the lottery, the fluctuation is short. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the time variation pattern presentation. By shortening the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern presentation that results in a loss, the player can be made to feel that the period until the next big win is short, and that the big wins will continue in a short period. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The second hit random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second winning random number counter C3 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C3. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 7(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is set. , When it matches with the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined as a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table 202c is for normal design low probability (normal state period of normal design) and for high probability that normal design hit is higher than the low probability time (normal design It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessary attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the normal symbols are hit, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 64b is "0.2 seconds x 1 time. " is opened, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessary attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds". Since the opening period of the electric accessory to be played becomes very long as "0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times", the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 64b. A second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 7(c)) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol wins from the value (random number value) of the second winning random number counter C3 is stored in the ROM 202. is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbols are hit, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 64b is "1 second x 2 times". However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C3 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is cut off due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register of the register 210 when the power is cut off (including when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

5, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and various settings. and a value storage area 203e.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), each of which has a first per random number counter C1. , the first winning type counter C2, and each value of the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning), each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired value is Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the empty areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are displayed in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning), and each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning. Immediately after that, various information to be obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1, C2 and CS1, separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. . In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1), various types obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting the information is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is finished, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts winning/failing, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

Like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C3.

More specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is set in the execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C3 which is shifted (moved) to the execution area and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data into a reserved area with an area number that is one smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 25).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 25 and S705 in FIG. 30). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the variable display reserved balls reserved by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. (See S904 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805 in FIG. 31).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of variation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S905 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S903 in FIG. 32: No).

The various set value storage area 203e is a storage area in which various set values, flags, counters, and the like for executing main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 performs control based on the data stored in the various set value storage area 203e. This various set value storage area 203e will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description continues. Various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201 are defined in the ROM 202 . The contents of this ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 14. FIG. As shown in FIG. 7(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , a variation type selection table 202d, an offset setting table 202e, a variation pattern selection table 202f, a game result setting table 202g, a state setting table 202h, and a jackpot end clear table 202i are stored at least.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored. When one of the random values defined in the first winning random number table 202a matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first winning random number counter buffer, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. be.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7(b)) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 7(b), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first winning type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 99, the current jackpot is "jackpot A (time saving jackpot)". If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of 100 to 179, the current big winning is determined as "big winning B (probability variable big winning)". Also, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 180 to 194, the jackpot this time is determined to be "jackpot C (latent probability variable jackpot)", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 195 to 199. If so, the jackpot this time is determined as "jackpot D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)".

100 random numbers from 0 to 99 are set to be the big hits that shift to the low-probability state of the special symbols after the end of the big win and shift to the time-saving state of the normal symbols. On the other hand, 100 random numbers of 100 to 199 are set for the big wins (jack B to D) that shift to the high probability state of special symbols after the end of the big win. In other words, the ratio between the big win that shifts to the high probability state of the special symbols after the end of the big win and the big win that shifts to the low probability state of the special symbols is 1:1. In addition, among the jackpots that shift to the high probability state of the special symbols, the random numbers that become the jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) that are not notified to the player that the shift to the special pattern high probability state is 180 to 199. is set to 20. That is, it is constructed so that the transition to the high probability state of the special symbols is not reported once out of five times in the case of winning the jackpot that transitions to the high probability state of the special symbols. As a result, even if the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is not notified to the player, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol (that is, to the jackpot C or the jackpot D It is possible to make the player continue the game while anticipating that the player has won the lottery.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 7(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 7(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of , it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol wins, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). , the electric accessary attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high (during the time saving state of the normal design), when the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal design is winning. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). , the electric accessary attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened "1 second x 2 times".

The variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is a data table that defines the correspondence relationship between variation type data for determining a rough display mode of variation patterns and the variation type counter CS1. In this variation type selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of the entrance into which the ball enters are defined. Variation type data selected from the variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is converted into an offset value (pattern selection offset value) based on an offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) described later. Then, the content defined at the address ahead of the head address of the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) by the offset value is set as the variation pattern type.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the variation type selection table 202d includes a winning selection table 202d1, a special figure 1 loss selection table 202d2, and a special figure 2 loss selection table 202d3. there is The winning selection table 202d1 is a table for selecting variation type data when the special symbol lottery result is a big win. In addition, the selection table 202d2 for special symbol 1 loss is when the special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is lost. It is a table for selecting variation type data, and the selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 is a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is a table for selecting the fluctuation type data.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8(b) to 11, the flow of selecting a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) will be specifically described.

FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing a winning selection table 202d1 for selecting variation type data based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 when a special symbol jackpot is determined. As shown in FIG. 8(b), there are three types of variation patterns that can be selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot: "win short reach", "win long reach", and "win super reach". Fluctuation type data 00H, 01H, and 02H are respectively associated with them. Then, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H (short hit reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if it is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H (long reach hit) is selected as the fluctuation type data. If it is in the range of 180-199, 02H (hitting super reach) is selected as the variation type data. These fluctuation type data are converted into a pattern selection offset value, which is a value used to select the fluctuation pattern type, by an offset setting table 202e described later, and based on the fluctuation pattern selection offset value A fluctuation pattern selection table described later A variation pattern type is selected from 202f.

FIG. 9A shows that when the special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is lost, the variation type data is displayed. It is the figure which showed the selection table 202d2 for special figure 1 exclusion for selecting. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the variation patterns that can be selected when the special symbol 1 lottery is lost are "completely off", "missing short reach", "missing long reach", and "missing super Reach", and fluctuation type data 03H, 04H, 05H, and 06H are associated with these, respectively.

If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 164, 03H (completely out) is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if it is in the range of 165 to 184, 04H (short reach out) is selected as the fluctuation type data, If it is in the range of 185-194, 05H is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if it is in the range of 195-199, 06H is selected as the fluctuation type data. These fluctuation type data are also converted into pattern selection offset values using the offset setting table 202e and used to select the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, as in the case of the jackpot.

In FIG. 9B, when the special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 64b is lost, the variation type data is displayed. It is the figure which showed the selection table 202d3 for the special figure 2 exclusion for selecting. As shown in FIG. 9(b), the variation patterns that can be selected when the special symbol 2 lottery is lost are "completely lost", "missed short reach", "missed long reach", and "missed super reach", and fluctuation type data 07H, 08H, 09H, and 0AH are associated with these, respectively.

If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 184, 07H (complete failure) is selected as the fluctuation type data. That is, it is set so that the rate of selection of complete miss is higher than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. Also, if it is in the range of 185 to 194, 08H (missing short reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if it is in the range of 195 to 198, 09H is selected as the fluctuation type data, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 199. If there is, 0AH is selected as the fluctuation type data. That is, compared to the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, the rate of selection of the missed short reach, missed long reach, and missed super reach is set lower. By increasing the percentage of complete deviation and lowering the percentage of various deviation reach, it becomes easier to select the variable pattern production with short variable time in the high probability state of special patterns and the short time state of normal patterns, so until the next big hit period can be shortened, and an impression can be given to the player that the big wins are continuing in a short period of time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that the variation type data selected from the selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 is also pattern selection using the offset setting table 202e in the same way as in the case of a big hit or when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is converted into an offset value and used to select a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an offset setting table 202e referred to for determining a pattern selection offset value for selecting a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the variation type data values selected from the variation type selection table 202d are 00H, 01H, and 02H, the pattern selection offset values are 00H, 01H, and 02H from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), respectively. selected. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 03H (complete failure at the first entrance 64a), the pattern selection offset value selected according to the number of held balls is configured to change. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 03H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 04H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 05H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 06H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. By changing the selected pattern selection offset value according to the number of reserved balls, the selected variation pattern type can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern type with a shorter variation period is selected as the number of held balls increases. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of only erroneous variation patterns with long variation periods, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for playing the game.

The process of identifying the variation pattern type based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is performed when data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area. In this case, since the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved third area) with area number 1 smaller by shift processing, the pattern selection offset value is selected. The maximum value of the pending prize winning data (the number of pending balls) is 3 at the timing. For this reason, the offset value setting table 202e defines the case where the number of held balls is 0-3.

When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 04H (missing short reach at the first entrance 64a), 07H is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). be. On the other hand, if the selected variation type data value is 05H (missing long reach at the first entrance 64a), as in the case of complete missing, the pattern selection offset selected according to the number of held balls value changes. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 08H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 09H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 0BH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. As a result, as in the case of a complete loss, it is possible to suppress the continuation of only the variation pattern of the loss with a long variation period, so it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for playing the game. can.

When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 06H (missing super reach at the first entrance 64a), 0CH is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). be. On the other hand, if the selected variation type data value is 07H (complete failure at the second entrance 64b), the selected pattern selection offset value changes according to the number of held balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 0DH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 0EH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0FH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of only erroneous variation patterns with long variation periods, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for playing the game.

When the fluctuation type data values selected from the fluctuation type selection table 202d are 08H, 09H, and 0AH, 11H, 12H, and 13H are selected as the pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), respectively. As described above, the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) is used to select the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting variation pattern types based on pattern selection offset values. The variation pattern selection table 202f is a data table assigned to the range of addresses 1AF5H to 1B08H of the ROM 202, and one variation pattern type is defined for each address. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, "perfect super reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds, "complete loss B (special figure 1)" with a variation time of 8 seconds, and "off" with a variation time of 19 seconds Long Reach B (Special Figure 1)" and "Completely Missing D (Special Figure 2)" with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds are defined. In addition, special figure 1 shows the variation based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, and special figure 2 shows the variation based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 64b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type for executing variation is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202f and the pattern selection offset value. Specifically, with respect to 1AF5H, which is the top address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, the variation pattern type specified in the address ahead by the selected pattern selection offset value is determined as the current variation pattern type. is configured as

For example, when the special symbol is a jackpot and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 100, 01H is selected as the variation type data from the winning selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 8(b)). Based on the variation type data value and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), 01H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Therefore, as the current variation pattern type, the data defined in 1AF6H, which is an address obtained by adding 01H of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5H, which is the top address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, the "win long reach" with a fluctuation period of 20 seconds is selected.

Also, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is lost, the value of the variation type counter is 190, and the number of reserved balls is 2. 05H is selected as the variation type data from the selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 9(a)) for special figure 1 deviation. Then, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of held balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the current variation pattern type, the data defined in 1AFFH, which is an address obtained by adding 0AH of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5, which is the top address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, the "off long reach C (special figure 1)" with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds is selected.

Also, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 64b is out, the value of the variation type counter is 20, and the number of reserved balls is 3. , 07H is selected as the variation type data from the selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 9(b)) for special figure 2 out. Then, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of held balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the current variation pattern type, the data defined in 1B05H, which is an address obtained by adding 10H of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5, which is the top address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, "completely out of D (special figure 2)" with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the variation type counter value CS1, the type of the ball entrance into which the ball entered, and the number of held balls. configured to select. Further, when the ball entrance into which the ball enters is the second ball entrance 64b, the variation pattern presentation with a shorter variation period is more likely to be selected than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. It is configured. That is, during the probability variation of the special symbol, which is a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 64b, and during the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the variation pattern presentation with a short variation time can be easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the period until the next big win is short and that the big win will continue in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the larger the number of held balls, the easier it is for a variation pattern type with a shorter variation time to be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of only erroneous variation patterns with long variation periods, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for playing the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even with the same variation type data value, if different variation times are selected according to the number of held balls, the same variation time is selected regardless of the number of held balls. Although the detachment is provided, it is not limited to this. For example, for all deviations, it may be configured to vary the variation time according to the number of held balls. In addition, when it is lost in the lottery of special pattern 1, only the loss in which the same fluctuation time is selected is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls, and when it is lost in the lottery of special pattern 2 may be configured such that only deviations in which different fluctuation times are selected according to the number of held balls are selected. As a result, the variation pattern performance with a short variation time can be easily selected during the probability variation of the special symbol, which is a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 64b, and during the time-saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can be made to feel that the period until the next big win is short and that the big win will continue in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the offset setting table 202e is used to determine the pattern selection offset value from the variation type data in order to select the variation pattern type according to the number of held balls. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of converting directly into an offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete without delay the process of determining the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game. Therefore, it takes time to determine the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, and the variation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. You can restrain yourself from giving.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the ROM 202 is continued. In the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), when a big win is won, set values such as a setting of a stop symbol indicating a big win and an operation pattern of a specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a during a big win are set according to the big win type. It is a data table prescribed for each. This game result setting table 202g will be described with reference to FIG.

The game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12) is stored in the range of addresses "19D1H" to "19E8H" of the ROM 202, and each address stores 1-byte data. In this game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), the number of determination values (random number) for each jackpot type (number of determination values), lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs 37a (number of displayed symbols), and special symbols. Information indicating a stop symbol (stop symbol information), an operation pattern (large opening pattern) of a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and information (offset value) for determining a gaming state after a big win is completed. is stipulated. In FIG. 12, the addresses of the ROM 202 where each data is specified are written in parentheses, but the high-order bytes of the addresses are omitted and only the low-order bytes are shown.

In the pachinko machine 10, based on the winning of the jackpot, the setting values corresponding to the winning jackpot type are stored in the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12). 15). Details of the various set value storage area 203e will be described later. Then, based on the set values stored in the various set value storage area 203e, the MPU 201 performs various controls related to the variation pattern production for the big win and the big win. In addition to a storage area for storing game-related setting values, the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 15) stores offset values defined in the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12). offset value storage area is provided. This offset value is a value used for setting the gaming state after the end of the big win.

Specifically, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 37) executed when the jackpot end timing is determined, various setting values regarding the game state after the jackpot end (whether to set the special symbol high probability state and the time period of the normal design) are selected from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13(a)) and set in the various setting value storage area 203e. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning) is used as the end of the jackpot. The game state after the jackpot is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), but the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b ( Only the offset value selected based on the random value (counter value) acquired along with the start winning) is held in the jackpot.

Here, when the random number value to be a big win is held during the fluctuation pattern presentation at the time of winning the big win or during the subsequent big win state, the big win is made by reading out the big win random number by an illegal player. The timing at which the random number appears is analyzed, and based on the analyzed timing, there is a possibility that a jackpot may be illegally assigned. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the acquired random number (counter value) is converted into an offset value and held until the end of the big win, and the game state after the end of the big win is set based on the offset value. Since it is configured as above, the period in which the random number itself which becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is held can be limited to a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value for the special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values relating to the game state after the end of the jackpot (setting value indicating whether or not to set a high probability state for special symbols, time period for normal symbols, etc.) are held. Instead, only offset values, which are values indicating storage positions of various setting values in the state setting table 202h, are held. Efficient use of the storage area of the RAM 203 because it is sufficient to provide an area for holding offset values instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203. can be done.

Next, the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. This state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13(a)) is a table in which game states that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot are defined in the order of the offset value, and is executed when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot. This data table is referred to for setting the gaming state after the end of the big win in the big win end process (see FIG. 37).

This state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13(a)) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD8H to 1AE3H of the ROM 202, and each address stores 1-byte data. This state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13(a)) includes information (lottery state of special symbols) indicating whether or not to shift to a high probability state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot, and time saving of normal symbols after the end of the jackpot. Information indicating whether or not to shift to a state (normal pattern state), normal pattern time period (time reduction number) given after the end of the jackpot, and a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the variation pattern mode. The number of lotteries of special symbols required to switch from the table for after the end of the jackpot to the table corresponding to the state (variation pattern selection table switching number) is stipulated. In FIG. 8, the addresses of the ROM 202 where each data is defined are written in parentheses, but the upper bytes of the addresses of the ROM 202 are omitted and only the lower bytes are shown.

Next, description contents of the state setting table 202h in the program will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing a simplified example of the description contents of the state setting table 202h of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. The left side of FIG. 13(b) is an example of the description content, and the right side shows the meaning of the description. As shown in FIG. 13B, first, a label "TBL1" is defined as a table name indicating the state setting table 202h. By prescribing the label name, the start address of the state setting table 202h can be read by simply describing "TBL1" in other processing. That is, it is not necessary to input the address value itself of the state setting table 202h in other processing. In particular, if the model changes, the control processing and the number of data stored in the ROM 202 may change. The assigned address value may also change. Even in such a case, if the top address of the state setting table 202h is associated with the label "TBL1", when the program is diverted to other models, the address can be read in each process of reading the state setting table 202h. no need to retype. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a program input error when diversion of the program, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

In the line next to the line defining the label, the data corresponding to the offset value 00H among the data to be defined in the state setting table 202h are described in the order of the addresses to be stored. Specifically, 00H is data for defining address 1AD8H, 00H is data for defining address 1AD9H, 64H is data for defining address 1ADAH, and data for defining address 1AD9H. A certain 64H is collectively described in one line. Similarly, the data corresponding to the offset value 01H and the data corresponding to the offset value 02H are collectively described in one line. In other words, in one process of reading data from the state setting table 202h and setting the game state of the pachinko machine 10, a series of data that are read out continuously are written together in one line. In this way, by writing the data corresponding to each offset value together in one line, it is possible to check whether there is any omission or duplication in the data corresponding to each offset value (the number of data corresponding to each offset value is equal). The designer can easily check whether the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to omission or duplication occurring when defining data.

In the program, in the line between the line specifying the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and the line specifying the data corresponding to the offset value 01H, the number of data corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h is , "D_SIZE" are defined. In the definition, "EQU" means equal, and "$" means the current position (the address next to the last data corresponding to the offset value 00H). That is, it defines that "D_SIZE" is the difference between the address next to the end of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and "TBL1" (the top address of the state setting table 202h). In this embodiment, the top address of the state setting table 202h is 1AD8H, and the end address of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H is 1ADBH, so "D_SIZE" is 0004H, which is the difference between 1ADCH and 1AD8H. .

By defining the label "D_SIZE" as the number of data in this way, it is sufficient to describe only "D_SIZE" when using the number of data in the state setting table 202h in other processing. That is, there is no need to define the number of data itself in other processing. In particular, if the model changes, the number of data defined in the state setting table 202h may change. Even in such a case, if the label "D_SIZE" is defined as the number of data, the number of data can be rewritten in each process that uses the number of data in the state setting table 202h when diverting the program to another model. No need. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a program input error when diversion of the program, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the label "D_SIZE" indicating the number of data is defined using the label "TBL1" instead of the direct value of the number of data. This eliminates the need to rewrite the definition of "D_SIZE" even when the program is diverted to another model with a different number of data. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent mistakes in rewriting the definition of "D_SIZE" when diverting the program, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, "TBL1" is defined as a label only at the top address of the state setting table 202h, but for each offset value (for each series of data read continuously in one process) , may be configured to define separate labels for the top addresses. For example, the label "TBL2" is associated with the start address (1ADCH) of the data corresponding to the offset value 01H, and the label "TBL3" is associated with the start address (1AE0H) of the data corresponding to the offset value 02H. good too. In this case, the definition of "D_SIZE" may be defined by the difference between "TBL2" and "TBL1", or by the difference between "TBL3" and "TBL2". Alternatively, it may be defined as a value obtained by dividing the difference between "TBL3" and "TBL1" by 2.

Also, the name of each label (“TBL1”, “D_SIZE”, etc.) is not limited to the names in this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. This is because the label name has no effect on the operation of the actual machine. More specifically, in the process of translating (assembling) the created program into a language (machine language) that the MPU 201 can understand, all the labels that appear in each process are converted into the values of addresses and data numbers themselves. . That is, when the program is reflected in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, all the various labels are replaced with hexadecimal machine language. Therefore, the name of the label does not affect the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at all.

Also, the program description method for defining labels by associating addresses and data numbers is not limited to the state setting table 202h, and may be referred to in other processes such as the game result setting table 202g, for example. A similar description method may be followed for all data tables.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the jackpot end clear table 202i will be described. The jackpot end clear table 202i is a table stored in the range of addresses "1205H" to "1212H" of the ROM 202, and each address defines the address of the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 15). there is Although the details will be described later, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), which is one process in the jackpot end process, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 clears the stored data from the jackpot end clear table 202i in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202. It is read, and "00H" (initial value data) is set as a setting value at the address indicated by the read storage data (address data). Further, when the data read from the jackpot end clear table 202i is "00H", the zero setting process is terminated. Only the set destination address is defined in the jackpot end clear table 202i, and the process of setting "00H" to the set destination address is defined in the control program of the MPU 201, so the jackpot end clear table 202i data volume can be reduced.

Next, various set value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 will be described. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the various setting value storage area 203e. As shown in FIG. 15, the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 15) corresponds to the range of addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. In the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 15), the firing control signal setting value storage area assigned to the address "F000H" of the RAM 203 is a memory in which the setting values for controlling ball launch are stored. area, and the launch of balls to the game area is controlled based on the set values stored in this area.

The display LED setting area assigned to the address "F009H" of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which setting values for lighting patterns for lighting the display LEDs are stored. to turn on the display LED.

A test signal setting area 1 and a test signal setting area 2 assigned to addresses "F01DH" and "F01EH" respectively are storage areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals. The test signal includes, for example, a signal for performing an operation test of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit, and the like. Since it is a test signal, it is set so that the signal is not output while the player is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the test signal setting areas 1 and 2 are both set to "00H" as the set value).

The maximum round number setting area assigned to the address "F030H" is an area for setting the number of rounds for the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all jackpots are jackpots of eight rounds, so when a jackpot is won, "08H" is set as the set value.

The game state setting area assigned to the address "F035H" of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which the setting value indicating the current game state is stored. , indicates that the special symbols are fluctuating, if it is "02H", it indicates that the special symbols are being confirmed and displayed, and if it is "03H", it indicates that the jackpot is in progress and the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is closed. If it is "04H", it indicates that the jackpot is in progress and the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is open. Also, if it is "00H", it is in a state other than the above (that is, the state between after the jackpot is finished and the special design starts to change, or the special design is stopped and displayed when there is no reserved ball. after a certain period of time).

The jackpot flag assigned to the address "F090H" is a flag indicating whether or not the current state is a jackpot state (special game state). If it is), it indicates that it is in the middle of a special symbol jackpot, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), a state other than the special symbol jackpot (that is, a special symbol state, such as the state of fluctuation of the state of The storage areas assigned to subsequent addresses "F091H" to "F094H" are areas for setting data read from the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202. FIG.

First, the probability variation state flag assigned to the address "F091H" is a flag indicating whether the current special symbol is in the process of probability variation, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is "01H" If it is), it indicates that the special symbol is in the process of changing probability, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. .

In addition, the time saving state flag assigned to the address "F092H" indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and is a setting value for specifying a table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern when out. is stored. If the flag is "00H", it indicates the normal state of the normal design, and if the flag is "01H", it indicates the time saving state 1 of the normal design.

When the time saving state counter assigned to the address "F093H" shifts to the low probability state of the special design after the jackpot is completed and shifts to the time saving state of the normal design, how many times the time saving number of times of the normal design remains. This is a counter that indicates whether the In addition, when the transition to the high probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal pattern continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of lotteries of the special pattern. be. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the variable probability state flag is ON or the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more, control of the time saving state of normal symbols is executed.

The variation selection state counter assigned to the address "F094H" is a counter that indicates the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the table for selecting the variation pattern effect is switched to another table. If this counter is 1 or more, a variation pattern selection table dedicated to after the end of the jackpot is selected as a table for selecting a variation pattern when the game is out. On the other hand, when the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the table corresponding to the game state indicated by the time saving state flag.

The offset value storage area assigned to the address "F095H" is a storage area for storing the offset value, and based on the stored offset value, the set value after the jackpot is read out from the state setting table 202h. , are set to addresses “F091H” to “F094H” of the RAM 203, respectively. This offset value is read from the game result setting table 202g and stored in the offset value storage area when a big hit is determined in the special symbol lottery. In addition, the initial value "00H" is overwritten during the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed after the setting value is read from the state setting table 202h and the setting is completed.

The large opening setting area assigned to the address "F096H" is a storage area for storing a set value indicating the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a during the big win. (when the jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all jackpot types are 8-round jackpots, and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is common, so a common set value is set.

The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address "F097H" is an area for setting the information of the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a stop symbol code indicating a stop symbol corresponding to the failure is set, and when the lottery result is a win, the stop symbol code corresponding to the big win type is read from the game result setting table 202e. issued and set. Then, when the variation of the special symbols ends, the stop symbols corresponding to the set values set in the stop symbol code information storage area are fixedly displayed on the first symbol display device 37 .

Addresses "F09FH" to "F0FFH" are unused areas, and data stored in these areas is fixed to "00H". Various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those described above in the various setting value storage area 203e. Although the explanation is omitted, for example, various counters such as a prize winning counter that counts the number of balls that have won a prize in the specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a, and the time for switching the display of the normal symbol in the variable effect of the normal symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values, counters, timers, etc. are stored intensively in the various setting value storage area 203e whose upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. A ring buffer for storing commands (for example, variation pattern commands, stop type commands, etc.) to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, normal symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, stack area etc. are stored in an address other than "F0H" in the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 (for example, an address in which the upper byte is "F1H").

Next, referring to FIG. 16, register 210 provided in MPU 201 of main control unit 110 will be described. The register 210 temporarily stores address data and setting value data when reading data from the ROM 202 or RAM 203 or writing setting values to the RAM 203, and performs arithmetic processing on the stored setting values. is. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a that can perform arithmetic processing on stored data, and general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, and 210d2 that can store address data and set value data. , a flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e as a fixed value. Note that the accumulator 210a can also be used to temporarily store data, similar to the general-purpose registers 210b1-210d2.

Each register provided in register 210 is configured to be able to hold 1-byte data. The general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2, the general-purpose registers 210c1 and 210c2, and the general-purpose registers 210d1 and 210d2 can also be used in pairs. That is, each pair of registers can store a total of 2 bytes of data. For example, the address data of the ROM 202 and the address data of the RAM 203 correspond to the 2-byte data.

The flag register 210e has a different flag for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flags are, for example, a zero flag that turns off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero, and turns on if it is zero, or data stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. A load flag or the like is provided which turns off if the data is other than "00H" and turns on if "00H".

The control for reading and writing data will be described below. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various instructions for executing various controls of the main controller 110, and data reading and writing is performed by executing one of the various instructions. is executed using Specifically, for example, a transfer command is prepared for specifying a read source and a setting destination and transferring data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

In this transfer instruction, at least one of the reading source and the setting destination must specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or one of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). be. Therefore, for example, when reading data specified at the address "1ADAH" of the ROM 202 and storing the read data at the address "F093H" of the RAM 203, it is necessary to transfer the data via the general-purpose register 210b1, for example. Specifically, first, with the address "1ADAH" as the read source and the general-purpose register 210b1 as the setting destination, the data specified at the address "1ADAH" is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 using a transfer instruction. Next, with the general-purpose register 210b1 as the read source and the address "F093H" as the setting destination, the transfer instruction is executed again to set the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address "F093H". By controlling in this way, the data specified at the address "1ADAH" of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address "F093H" of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a that defines a plurality of aspects of variation pattern effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. When a variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is received, the mode of the corresponding variation pattern is selected from this variation pattern table 222a. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 starts winning, from each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 obtained according to the starting winning , Various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main control device 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64a or second ball entrance 64b, or when main controller 110 When the variable display in the pattern is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1902 in FIG. 42). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S1702) of the main processing (see FIG. 40). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 41), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command, and the set stop type is used for display. The display control device 114 is notified by the stop type command.

In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and the like. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are the data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has the characteristic that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the command pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 43) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being delayed.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64a is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 64b is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 43).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 18 . FIG. 18 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 18(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the entry of the ball into the first entry ball 64a or the second entry hole 64b is detected. 18(b) and 18(c), the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b is used to draw the power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. 19(a). 19(b) is for back surface B corresponding to "empty stage", and FIG. 20 is for back surface C corresponding to "island stage". are shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 19, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B among the backs A to C are images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. It is prepared in the ROM 234 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between position a and position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "town stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 moves the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow leftward.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the rear image on the rear surface C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back surface C, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over a mountain changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface C. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 20(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 20(c) is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 20(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 20(a) is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c. Further, the rear surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20(a), and image data corresponding to the rear surface images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' or the range shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) are stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the back image area of the resident video RAM 235 will be displayed. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for the rear surfaces B and C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

20(a) and 20(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. 20(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20(b)-(c) and FIGS. ) to (b) are set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 20(b) to (c) and FIGS. 20(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 for the rear surfaces B and C is stored in sub-areas dedicated to rear-surface images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b′ and b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as main designs to which numbers "0" to "9" are not assigned, main designs consisting of back designs such as wooden boxes, and back designs and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, and helmets are displayed. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e so that the display control device 114 can control the sound lamp. When the character design is to be changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 234, but the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235 is read. , the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence and the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image of one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , a display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable production is started, if the stop type of the variable production is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable production is one of the jackpots. If so, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed.

The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on, and the demo effect, as described above, is started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect is stopped. When the next variable performance associated with winning a prize is not started, the third pattern, which is the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and consists of the main symbols '0' to '9' to which the numbers are not attached, is stopped. As it is displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the round effect and one display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables. Similarly, the pseudo variation data table, which is a display data table for the effect during the jackpot state, is also provided with a number of tables corresponding to the set variation effect pattern.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing an insertion of a character, a boy image, a character used for various effects such as characters, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also describes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, the third symbols to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 22).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display a wide variety of effect images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2405 in FIG. 43). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 53(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2701 in FIG. 45B). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2708 in FIG. 45(b) S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 53A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 53(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 23) that describes the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 45(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 50) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 23), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites according to the color information, color tone correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. Therefore, the type and address of the storage RAM where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 45(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 50). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 during main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3513 in FIG. 54). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 54). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 24 to 38. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the second winning random number counter C3 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the second winning random number counter C3, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 249, 199, 199, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, CS1 and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of suspensions of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is determined based on the data shifted to the execution area (S208). Incidentally, the big hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f based on the variation type counter CS1 (depending on the variation pattern command is determined), and if this fluctuation time has not passed (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by the big win setting process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. 27 or the losing time setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the start of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S212).

In the process of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage area 203e is 1 or more (S213). , If the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving state counter is subtracted by 1 (S214), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving state counter is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the big hit determination process (S208). This jackpot determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters obtained, lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and fluctuations performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the effect.

In the jackpot determination process, first, a first hit random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability is selected from the first hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and it is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot. (S301). After that, the variable probability state flag stored in the various set value storage area 203e is read (S302), and it is determined whether or not the variable probability state flag indicates a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

As a result of the process of S303, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), the first random number table 202a for high probability is selected from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. (not shown) is read out, and a new random number table 202a1 for low probability is set as a table for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. . On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in a high probability state (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S303: No), the process of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305. do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first winning random number counter C1 and S
301 or a table (comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol jackpot set in the process of S304 is compared (S306).

As described above, in the first winning random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability, three random numbers "7, 107, 240" are set as the special symbol jackpot. In the first winning random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, "4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249" are set. In the process of S306, among these tables, the random number value specified in the table set as the comparison source table is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 one by one.

Based on this comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches any of the random numbers specified in the comparison source table (S307). If there is (that is, in the case of a special symbol jackpot), a jackpot time setting process for setting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot is executed (S308), and the process moves to S310. do. On the other hand, if there is no matching random number value in the process of S307 (that is, if the special symbol is out), a loss time setting process for setting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of loss is executed (S309), The process proceeds to S310. Details of the jackpot time setting process (S308) and the losing time setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, in the process of S310, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and the process ends. Since the various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even if a big win occurs, the random number value (counter value) to become a big win can be cleared before the big win state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value for the special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside. can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set in a so-called hanging board, random numbers are obtained at the timing when the random number value that will be the big win appears, and control is performed to determine whether the big win is appropriate or not. can be done. In this embodiment, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared during the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26), but the present invention is not limited to this. It should be cleared before it is recognized that it will be. Therefore, for example, the process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during the variable effect or before the symbols are stopped.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or not, in the process of S301, the first per random number table for low probability is set once. This is for setting a table for comparison. That is, when none of the first winning random number tables (the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability or the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability) is set, the influence of noise or the like Even if there is a problem that the processing of S303 and S304, which are intermediate processing, is skipped due to the above, the jackpot is determined based on the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability set at the beginning of the jackpot determination processing. You can judge whether it is right or wrong.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the jackpot time setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. As described above, this jackpot time setting process is a process for setting the aspect of the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot.

In this process, first, the jackpot flag of the various set value storage area 203e is set to ON (S401), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot hit this time is selected. Identify the type (S402). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7(b)). For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80", the counter value is within the range of "0" to "99", so the jackpot type this time is specified as the jackpot A (time-saving jackpot). . Also, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "190", the counter value is within the range of "180" to "194", so the jackpot type this time is the jackpot C (latent probability variable jackpot). identified.

Next, the setting value corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202h of the ROM 202, and the read setting value is set in the corresponding storage area of the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 (S403), The process proceeds to S404. Here, the setting values to be read from the game result setting table 202h and set in the various setting value storage area 203e include the lighting pattern of the LED 37a (the number of displayed symbols), the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol (stop symbol code), and the like. , a control pattern (large opening pattern) of a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the like.

As described above, when setting value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the data of the transfer source address and the data of the setting destination address are stored in one of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Store temporarily. Then, the setting value data read from the ROM 202 based on the stored transfer source address data is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers that does not store the address data, and then the setting destination address is stored. The set value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data of . In the process of S403, the transfer control via the register 210 is repeated by the number of set value data to be transferred.

In the process of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random value (counter value), and in the process of S403, various setting values are determined based on the specified jackpot type. , and various set values may be directly associated with each other and defined. In other words, the ROM 202 may be provided with a table that defines the range of random number values (counter values) and various corresponding set values, and this table may be referenced to directly identify the set values from the random number values. .

In the process of S404, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and compared with the winning selection table 202d1 of the variation type selection table 202d to select the variation type data (S404). For example, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "10", "01H" corresponding to winning long reach is selected as the variation type data. Further, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "190", "02H", which is a value corresponding to winning super reach, is selected as the variation type data.

Next, the pattern selection offset value is determined by comparing the selected variation type data with the offset setting table 202e (S405). Specifically, if the selected variation type data is "00H", "00H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value, and if the variation type data is "01H", "01H" is set as the pattern selection offset value. , and if the variation type data is "02H", "02H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the variation pattern type is identified from the variation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the address ahead of 1AF5H, which is the head address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the pattern selection offset value is specified as the variation pattern type in this pattern variation. do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "01H", "hit long reach" defined at 1A6FH, which is an address "01H" ahead of address 1AF5H, is specified as the current variation type.

Then, a variation pattern command based on the identified variation pattern type is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S407). The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later.

After setting the variation pattern, a game result set value acquisition process is executed for acquiring and setting offset information, which is information for setting the game state after the end of the big win, at the end of the big win (S408). , the process ends.

Next, the game result set value acquisition process (S408) will be described with reference to FIG. The game result set value acquisition process (S408) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for causing the RAM 203 to hold an offset value based on the special symbol lottery result.

In the game result setting value acquisition process (S408), first, the offset value based on the current jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12(b)) (S501). For example, if the jackpot type this time is the jackpot C, "02H" is read as the offset value. Then, the read offset value is stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage area 203e (S502), and this process is terminated.

The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage area 203e in the process of S502 is held until the end timing of the jackpot, and the jackpot end processing (Fig. 37 ), it is used to determine the data to be read from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). In this way, the random value (counter value) acquired with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning) is converted into an offset value, and the offset value storage area is converted into an offset value. , and the game state after the end of the big win is set based on the offset value, so that the period in which the random number itself that becomes the big win of the special symbol is held is limited to a short period. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, in the jackpot determination process (S208), when the result of the lottery this time is determined to be the loss of the special symbol, the loss time setting process is executed to set the aspect of the variation pattern. (S309) will be described.

In the setting process at the time of loss, first, the selection table 202d2 for special figure 1 that is defined in the variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 9(a)), or the selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 9(b) ), the table corresponding to the entrance into which the ball entered is read, and the variation type data value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S601). Here, the table corresponding to the entrance into which the ball enters is the selection table 202d2 for special figure 1 omission (Fig. 9(a) )), and if the ball entrance into which the ball enters is the second ball entrance 64b, it is a selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 out (see FIG. 9(b)).

After the end of the process of S601, the pattern selection offset value is set to the offset setting table 202e based on the value of the selected variation type data and the current number of reserved balls (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c). (see FIG. 10) (S602). For example, if the value of the variation type data is "03H" and the number of held balls is "2", "05H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Also, if the value of the variation type data is "09H", "12H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value regardless of the number of held balls.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the variation pattern type is identified from the variation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the address ahead of 1AF5H, which is the head address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the pattern selection offset value is specified as the variation pattern type in this pattern variation. do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "05H", "Completely out of line C (special figure 1)" specified at address 1AFAH, which is "05H" ahead from address 1AF5H, is selected. In other words, the variation pattern type is determined as an out-of-range mode in which the reach of the variation time of 6 seconds does not occur. Also, for example, if the pattern selection offset value is "12H", the "missing long reach (special figure 2)" specified at the address 1B07H, which is "12H" ahead from the address 1AF5H, is selected. That is, the deviation mode with a reach of 17 seconds is determined as the variation pattern type.

Next, a variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern type is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S604), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) to determine whether or not there is a win (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b. , when there is a start winning, it is a process for executing the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203c (suspension of variable display in the special symbol) N) is acquired (S702), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Then, if there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (S701: No), or if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated and the timer interrupt process is returned to. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (S701: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S705, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S706, prediction of the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not it is a big win), its stop type (in the case of a big win, the big win type), and its variation pattern. (S707). Here, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined by combining the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the process of S606 and the random number value (hit value) stored in the first winning random number table 202a. Determined by comparing one. As described above, the random number for the special symbol jackpot when the special symbol probability is low is 3 of "7, 107, 240" stored in the first winning random number table 202a1 for when the special symbol probability is low. The random number value that becomes the special symbol jackpot when the special symbol is high probability is stored in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability, "4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 30 of 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249 is one.

Further, whether the current state is the special symbol low probability state or the special symbol high probability state is determined by referring to the variable probability state flag stored in the various set value storage area 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation state flag is ON, it is a special symbol high probability state, and if the probability variation state flag is OFF, it is a special symbol low probability state. In the process of S707, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation state flag are compared, and if these values match, a special It is determined that the symbol is a jackpot.

Then, when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S706 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, It is determined which type of jackpot among four types of special pattern jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). As described above, the jackpot type is identified by comparing the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7(b)).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the process of S706, the variation pattern type to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is completely out. It is determined whether it is a missing short reach, a missing long reach, or a missing super reach. As described above, the variation pattern type at the time of deviation is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) based on the pattern selection offset value converted from the value of the variation type counter CS1. .

By the process of S707, when the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the stop type), and the variation pattern are predicted, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S708), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 31, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 64b is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S802), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S804), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S805).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S808). Specifically, if the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variable state flag is ON, it is determined that it is the time saving state of the normal design. .

In the processing of S808, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the middle of a jackpot (S809). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbols are less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory attached to the second ball entering hole 64b is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 64b as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the first ball-entering hole 64a, the ball is prevented from entering the second ball-entering hole 64b during the special symbol jackpot. Many balls enter the ball opening 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64a becomes maximum (4 times).

In the process of S809, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so acquired in the process of S807. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C3 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S810). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 7(c)).

In the process of S808, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S808: No), the process proceeds to S811. In the process of S811, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C3 acquired in the process of S807 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S811). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 7(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S810 or S811 is the normal symbol win (S812), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S812: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S813). In the process of S813, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S814), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S814: Yes), it is now whether or not the special design is in the midst of a jackpot. is determined (S815). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S815: Yes), the process proceeds to S817. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 64b as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol misses. , the number of times of opening the electric accessary and the opening time are set.

In the process of S815, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the second ball entrance. 64b is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819. In the process of S814, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S814: No), the process proceeds to S817. In the process of S817, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern, so the opening period of the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 64b is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S817), and the process proceeds to S819.

In the processing of S812, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S812: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S818). In the process of S818, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not it is the time saving state of the normal design (S819), and if it is determined that it is the time saving state of the normal design (S819: Yes), the variable display in the second design display device 83 The variable time is set to 3 seconds (S820), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time-saving state of normal symbols (that is, the normal state of normal symbols) (S819: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S821), the process ends. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 64b becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b. becomes easy.

In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S822). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S822, if the variation time has not elapsed (S822: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S822, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823). In the process of S823, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S818, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S823, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S813 or the process of S818.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S824). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of the normal symbol (S824: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 64b is set (S825), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S825, when the electric accessory opening and closing processing (see S1205) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is performed. is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S824: No), the process of S825 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C3 for every two.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S903).

The ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203d (S904). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S905), and the process ends. In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if not stored (S1105: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1112.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1113, S1114).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1113, S1114) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1201 to S1206 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1209 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1201). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) or the start winning process (see FIG. 30). Also, the winning information command set in the startup winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1204), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the (large opening) 65a is executed (S1203). Here, the special symbol jackpot state specifically refers to determining that the variation time of the variation pattern production to be the jackpot has elapsed, and after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot. Indicates the period until setting. In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 64b is executed (S1204). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S825 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 31), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S816 or S817 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1205). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 of the big hit time setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the losing time setting process (see FIG. 29), the variation pattern The first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display corresponding to . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S407 of the big hit time setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the losing time setting process (see FIG. 29) is completed, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the process of S406 of the big hit time setting process (see FIG. 27) or the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29) of S603 The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of (1).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S820 or the process of S821 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 31), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S823 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 31), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S813 or S818 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 31). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1208: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the above-described processes after S1201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1208: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1 and second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (249 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C3) can be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1207, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 33 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1210 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1210), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1211). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area backed up in the RAM 203 and the work area.

The processing of S1207 is executed at the timing when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1206 ends, or at the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1209 performed within the remaining time ends. there is Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1201. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1203). This jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1301). Specifically, if the process of S212 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the processing of S1301, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1301: Yes), an opening command is set (S1302), and this processing is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1201) of the main processing (see FIG. 35). It is sent towards device 113 .

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1301: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1303). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1303, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1303: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (1303: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1304). If it is time to start a new round (S1304: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1305), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1306). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1201) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1304, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1304: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, 10 balls When winning a prize, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1307, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1308), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not met (S1307: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the big win (S1309).

In the process of S1309, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1309: Yes), the set value corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set, and the set value for the jackpot is reset. is executed (S1310), the game state after the end of the big win is set, and this process ends. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 37), the jackpot flag is initialized (set to "00H") along with other set values. Therefore, even when the power supply of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent only the jackpot flag from turning off and the other set values to remain set during the jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the final round of the big win, an ending effect is set for notifying the player of the end of the big win after the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are met. be. In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the end timing of the set ending effect (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has passed), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot.

The end timing of the jackpot is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the final round of the jackpot, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met, it may be determined that it is time to end the jackpot, and the process may proceed to the jackpot end processing (S1310). .

Next, referring to FIGS. 37 and 38, the jackpot ending process (S1310) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 during the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1310) is a process for setting the setting value corresponding to the game state after the jackpot ends and resetting the setting value for the jackpot.

In this jackpot ending process (S1310), first, the state setting table 202h is read out from the ROM 202 (S1401). Here, "reading" means that the upper byte (1AH) and lower byte (D8H) of the head address (1AD8H) of the state setting table 202h are used as address data for any pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose register 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2).

Next, in the game result set value acquisition process (see FIG. 28) executed before the start of the current jackpot, the offset value stored in advance in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 15) The offset value is stored in accumulator 210a.

Then, the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a is multiplied by the number of data "D_SIZE" (S1403). As described above, "D_SIZE" indicates the number of types of data corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13(a)). In this embodiment, the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13(a)) defines four types of set values, namely, the lottery state of special symbols, the state of normal symbols, the number of times of time saving, and the number of times of switching the variation pattern selection mode. Therefore, the numerical value corresponding to the number of data "D_SIZE" is "0004H".

As shown in parentheses in FIG. 13(a), the state setting table 202h includes, from the side with the smaller address value, the lottery state of the special design corresponding to the offset value 00H, the state of the normal design, the number of times of time reduction, and the selection of the variation pattern. Number of mode switching, special design drawing state corresponding to offset 01H, normal design state, time saving number, variation pattern selection mode switching number, special design drawing state corresponding to offset 02H, normal design state, time saving number, variation Data is stored in the order of the number of pattern selection mode switching. That is, every time the address value increases by four, a setting value corresponding to an offset value that is one larger is stored. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 is the difference (offset) between the top address of the state setting table 202h and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. In the process of S1403, the difference (offset) of the address with respect to the head address of this state setting table 202h is obtained.

When the processing of S1403 ends, the difference from the top address of the state setting table 202h calculated in the processing of S1402 is calculated for the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2) in the processing of S1401. (offset) is added, and the address after the addition is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1404).

Next, the address in which the variable probability state flag of the various setting value storage area 203e is stored is set as the setting destination address (S1405), and the data stored in the transfer source address set in the processing of S1404 is set as the setting destination address. is transferred (S1406).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the four types of data specified in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e (S1407). exists) (S1407: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data specified in the address after the addition is read (S1408), and 1 is added to the setting destination address. The data read in the process of S1408 is stored in the address after the addition (S1409). Then, returning to the processing of S1407, it is again determined whether or not all the four types of data specified in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e (S1407). That is, the processes of S1407 to S1409 are repeated until all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h are transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e (S1407: Yes), the various setting value storage area 203e is set. Set a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state (S1410), execute the processing (S1411, S1412) for clearing the set value of the jackpot, and finish this processing.

In the process of clearing the set value of the jackpot, the address immediately before the top address of the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot in the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1411). , Zero setting processing is executed to initialize by setting 0 to the address where the setting value in the big hit in the various setting value storage area 203e is set (S1412).

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. This zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is a process of initializing by overwriting with 0 the various setting values set in the various setting value storage area 203e in order to control during the jackpot.

In the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address and set as a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501).

Next, the address data stored at the address set as the transfer source (read source) address in the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) is read, and the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the read address data is read. is set as the destination address (S1502).

After the process of S1502, in the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (read source) address is "00H" (S1503), and it is determined that the read data is "00H". If so (S1503: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1503: No), the address of the RAM 203 set as the destination address is overwritten with "00H" (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

After that, the processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until "00H" is read from the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14). In the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14), "00H" is stored only in the last address, and "00H" is not stored in addresses other than the last. The processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until "00H" is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data stored in the memory.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), the setting number of times to set "00H" as data in the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. , It is determined that "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) without terminating the process when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times has been completed. It is configured to end the process when

If the number of setting times is described in the control program, every time the number of setting values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model, the designer of the control program newly counts the number of setting values, It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, counting the setting value is troublesome, and if the designer makes a mistake in counting, the wrong number of repetitions is specified in the control program, so the setting at the end of the jackpot is normally completed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14). can reduce the chance of making a mistake. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

The termination condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is that "00H" is read out as data because the lower byte of the address in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 15) is "00H" (i.e., address "F000H") is an area for storing setting values related to ball launch. address). Since the address does not require initialization at the end of the jackpot, there is no need to define it as an address to be initialized in the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14). ), there is no risk of it appearing anywhere other than at the end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent "00H" from being read as data and the process to end before initialization of all set values is completed.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 39, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (see S1716 in FIG. 30) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1713 in FIG. 40), it executes power-off processing in S1716. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1716 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1716. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), it will transfer to the process of S1604 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1716 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1716, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1606). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1609), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), an interrupt Permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1609 is skipped is that when the process of S1608 is reached from S1604 via the process of S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604, and noise, etc. When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and the start-up process is started, the control of the audio lamp control device 113 is continued by saving the data in the work area of the RAM 223 without clearing it. Because we can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1701 was executed (S1701). If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1710. In the process of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1702 to S1710 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1711 and the variable display setting process of S1712 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114.例文帳に追加By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win production, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect from a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1707 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to S1711. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1709 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the process of S1711, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1711). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the variable display setting process (S1712) is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off processing is executed (S1716). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. processing.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1807). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol ) is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1808). In addition, in the processing of S1808, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1808 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (starting winning), or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the main controller 110 Since it is transmitted from, each time the starting winning prize is detected or the special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1808 to the main control device It is matched with the value of the 110 special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected or during the special symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Incidentally, when the process of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S1807, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1807: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1809). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1810). After the processing of S1810 is completed, next, the winning information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1810 is stored in the first empty area (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. store in the area (S1811),
Return to main processing.

In the process of S1809, if the winning information command has not been received (S1809: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1812). When the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number ( S1814), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S1702) of the main processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1812, if the round number command has not been received (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not any other command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed ( S1819) and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1901: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1906: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the processing of S1806 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 41), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and based on the set stop type, the display control device A display stop type command for notification to 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 55. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame by the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2401) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2502, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) (S2505), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2401) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the auxiliary effect section.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S2501. , and the processing of S2502 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount at a time to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 53(a)), which will be described later. A resident image transfer setting process is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3702 in FIG. 53A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and simple display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control unit 110 via the sound lamp control unit 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the variation image shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing this command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701). If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2702) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2703) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond period. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start the variable effect, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and produce a performance image corresponding to that mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2703), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2704). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2703) or the simple display setting processing (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705), 23, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, front-back out reach, front-back out A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to reach or complete loss) are compared, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2701, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2701: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49, the details of the command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (2801: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2703) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2803).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2804), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2805) and returns to the processing of S2801.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2805) will be described with reference to FIG. 47(a). FIG. 47(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation longer than the set display data table is actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other variation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2905, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2904 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation defined in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2804, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2806), If there is a display variation type command (S2806: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2807), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the stop type command process (S2807) will now be described with reference to FIG. 47(b). FIG. 47(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, it corresponds to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, or complete loss). A stop type table is determined (S3001), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45(b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is set (S3002).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4002 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3003), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3002. In the above-described task processing (S2704), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3003, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description is continued. In the process of S2806, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S2808), If there is a display round number command (S2808: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the round number command processing (S2809) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3102).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command processing (S2809) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) is returned to.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2810). If there is an image change command (S2810: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the back image change command process (S2811) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flow chart showing the back image change command process (S2811). This back image change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing (S2811), first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3703) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S3201). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3202), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3201 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. . Then, when the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set by the processing in S3202 is used. , specifying the type of back image to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the type of RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2810, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2812). Otherwise (S2812: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801.

Details of the error command processing (S2813) will now be described with reference to FIG. 49(b). FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3302). Terminate the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process (S2703), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the type.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3302, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2812 that there is no error command (S2812: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2819), and the process returns to S2801.

In the process of S2801, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes ), and the processing of S2802 to S2819 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2801 to S2819 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S2708) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 47(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2901, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2703), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S3402 to S3404 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3402), S3403 and S3404 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S3403, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3403). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3404).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3501).

Based on this expanded warning image data, the task processing identifies the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3404), or if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3403: No), then the process proceeds to S3405.

In S3405, pointer update processing is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3601, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3603). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S3605), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3603, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3606), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3602: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 50, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S3406 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3408: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S3409).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3409: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S3410), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3411). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, by only changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2704), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last stop design determination flag set by S3415, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3409, if the fixed display flag is ON (S3409: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3416). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3416: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S3417), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing content so that is displayed.

In the process of S3416, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3416: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and that demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 18B or 18C) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the details of the transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3701). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 have not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer setting process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3701, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 will be transferred from the character ROM 234 to resident. is transferred to the video RAM 235 for use. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S3702), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). FIG. 53B is a flow chart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S3801). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3802). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S3802 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3802: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to S3803. Also, as a result of the processing of S3801, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process proceeds to S3803.

In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3803). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S3803, if all the resident image data have been transferred (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45B), command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent image data transfer from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 54) (see S3701: No in FIG. 53A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. Target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S3703), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3405) of the previously executed display setting process (S2703) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3902). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3903), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

Also, in the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3905. In the processing of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3906).

In the process of S3906, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3906 that the transfer process has not ended (S3906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to S3907. Also, as a result of the process of S3905, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3905: No), the process proceeds to S3907.

In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907). If the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S3908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S3909). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S3909: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S3911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3913.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S3913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The determination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S3913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3913 (S3913: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3914). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the leading address and the trailing address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (normal video RAM 236 here). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S3914, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2704) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4001). That is, in the processing of S4001, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2704). , parameters required for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details of each sprite are displayed in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S4002, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 45(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56-59. In the first embodiment, in order to read the setting values corresponding to the offset values from the state setting table 202h, the program preliminarily assigns a label "" to the number of setting values corresponding to the start address of the state setting table 202h and each offset value. TBL1" and "D_SIZE" are associated with each other. Namely, the label is used when reading and setting a part of the table. On the other hand, in this modified example, a method of defining a table that needs to be read out as a whole will be described. Tables that need to be read out in their entirety include, for example, the first winning random number table 202a and the second winning random number table 202c. In this modified example, the first winning random number table 202a will be described as an example.

FIG. 56(a) schematically shows the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability, and FIG. 56(b) schematically shows the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability. Fig. 3 shows. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the random value specified in the first per random number table 202a1 for the low probability time, the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first per random number counter buffer and are compared to determine whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big win. On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the random value specified in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability is compared with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first winning random number counter buffer. Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big win.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability (see FIG. 56(a)) is set with three random numbers "7, 107, 240" as the special symbol jackpot. ing. These three random numbers are stored at addresses 1A00H, 1A01H, and 1A02H of the ROM 202, for example.

In addition, in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability (see FIG. 56(b)), the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot are "4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64 , 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249. It is done. These 30 random numbers are stored in the range of addresses 1A03H to 1A20H of the ROM 202, for example. That is, the first winning random number table 202a1 for the low probability and the first winning random number table 202a2 for the high probability are defined continuously so as not to generate an empty address. Although the details will be described later, by continuously defining each table, if only the top address of each table is known, the difference between the top address of the adjacent table can be obtained. It is possible to easily calculate the number of data that are present.

Next, description contents of each table in the program will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of description contents of the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability and the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability.

As shown in FIG. 57, first, "TL_TBL" is defined as a label indicating the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability, and the next row defines the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. 07H, 6BH, and F0H are defined as data to be used. This random number is defined in order from address 00H of ROM 202 .

In addition, in the line next to the line in which the data (random value) specified in the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability is described, a label indicating the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability is written as " TH_TBL" is defined.

From the next row where the label "TH_TBL" is defined, 30 random numbers defined in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability are defined over three lines with 10 per line. there is Of these three lines, the first line is written to associate 10 random numbers with each line from address 03H to 0CH, and the second line is written to associate 10 random numbers with each line from address 0DH to 16H. It is written to associate random numbers one by one, and the third line is written to associate 10 random numbers one by one with each row of addresses 17H to 20H.

Note that by describing the random value in multiple lines, it is possible for the program creator to easily find omissions in the description of the random value. In other words, if 30 random numbers are written together in one line, it becomes difficult to determine at a glance how many random numbers are specified, and even if some of the random numbers are omitted, is also likely to be overlooked. On the other hand, in this modified example, the same number of random values are described in multiple lines. Since only the second line is shortened, it can be determined at a glance that there is an error in the second line. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress program description errors, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the gaming machine based on the erroneous description. In this modified example, the number of random value descriptions per line is 10, but the number is not limited to this, and the number may be set so that omissions in description can be easily found. For example, the number of random values specified per line may be 6, and may be divided into 5 lines, or the number of random values specified per line may be 15, and may be divided into 2 lines. .

In the line next to the line in which the data (random value) defined in the first per random number table 202a2 for high probability is described, the second per random number table 202c for low probability (random number table per normal symbol) "FL_TBL" is specified as a label to indicate, and from the next row, random numbers that are normal symbols are described when the probability of normal symbols is low. Although illustration is omitted, the random numbers for the normal symbols are also written in multiple lines, with 10 random numbers per line as the maximum value, just like the random numbers for the special symbols. there is

In the program, the number of random numbers forming each table is specified at a location different from the specified location of each table (the first winning random number table 202a and the second winning random number table 202c). Specifically, "TL_SIZE" is defined as the number of random values defined in the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability, and further defined in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability. "TH_SIZE" is defined as the number of random values. In this way, since the number of random numbers is defined by associating it with the label, it is not necessary for the program creator to directly count the number of random numbers and define them numerically in all processes for reading random numbers. do not have. In particular, when the program is used for other models, the number of random numbers may change. However, in this modification, even if the number changes, the meanings of the labels "TL_SIZE" and "TH_SIZE" do not change. Therefore, there is no need to rewrite the contents of the process of reading the number of random numbers in each process. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for omission of rewriting to occur when diversion of the program, so that it is possible to suppress malfunction of the gaming machine due to mistake in rewriting the program. In addition, in this modified example, the part where each table is described and the part where the number of random numbers forming each table are described are collectively described in one place in the program. By arranging description locations for each type of description content in this manner, it is possible to prevent omission of rewriting by the creator of the program when the program is transferred to another model. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to program rewriting errors.

"TL_SIZE" is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label "TH_TBL" and the address indicated by the label "TL_TBL". "TH_SIZE" is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label "FL_TBL" and the address indicated by the label "TH_TBL". In this way, if the number of random values defined in each table is defined by the label associated with the head address of each table, the position of the table defined in the ROM 202 may change, or the random number defined in the table may change. Even if the number of numeric values changes, there is no need to rewrite the definition of the label. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for omission of rewriting to occur when diversion of the program, so that it is possible to suppress malfunction of the gaming machine due to mistake in rewriting the program. Further, in this modified example, one random number is stored in one address, and the random number is defined so that no empty address is generated between the tables. As a result, since the range of addresses defined in each table matches the number of random numbers, the random numbers defined in each table can be easily identified by the label associated with the top address of each table. can be calculated. Note that the definition of the label is not limited to the contents of this modified example, and may be arbitrarily determined so that the program creator can easily understand it.

Next, control processing of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In the special symbol variation process (S104) of this modification, each process of S201 to S207 and each process of S209 to S214 are the processes of S201 to S207 of the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment. , and the same processes as those of S209 to S214 are executed. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, when the data in the special symbol holding storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area by the processing of S207 (S207), the jackpot determination processing 2 is executed (S221), and this processing ends. . This jackpot determination process 2 (S221) is based on the random number specified in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first winning random number counter buffer, and the special symbol. This is the process of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot. The details of this big hit determination process 2 (S221) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the jackpot determination process 2 (S221) in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. In each of S302, S303, S305, and S307 to S310 of this big win determination process 2 (S221), the same process as the big win determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, when it is determined in the process of S303 that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (that is, the high probability The top address of the first winning random number table 202a2 for time) is set as the comparison source address (S311), and "TH_SIZE" (that is, the number of random values specified in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability ) is set as the number of times of comparison (S312), and the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S303, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S303: No), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (that is, the first per random number table 202a1 for low probability ) is set as the comparison source address (S313), and "TL_SIZE" (that is, the number of random values defined in the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability) is set as the number of comparisons (S314 ), and the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305 that proceeds after the processing of S312 or S314, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first winning random number counter buffer is read (S305), then the read first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random number specified in the comparison source address (S315). Then, the comparison source address is incremented by 1 and the number of comparisons is decremented by 1 (S316), and it is determined whether or not the number of comparisons after the subtraction is 0 (S317). Yes), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of comparisons is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) by the process of S317 (S317: No), the process moves to S315 again, and S315 to S317 are performed until the number of comparisons becomes 0. Repeat process. That is, each random value specified in the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability or the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 are All random values are compared one by one.

In this way, by using the label when reading the table or reading the number of random values specified in the table, when the program is diverted to other models, the jackpot determination process 2 (S208) in the program can be performed. Since the correction of the description content of the program can be omitted, errors in correcting the program can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to an error in correcting the program.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the variation type data selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. Then, the variation type data is converted into a pattern selection offset value using the offset setting table 202e, and used to select the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f. Also, in the offset setting table 202e, even if the value of the variation type data is the same, in the case of predetermined variation type data values (03H, 05H, 07H), different pattern selection offset values are selected according to the number of held balls. It is configured so that Thereby, the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern can be changed according to the number of held balls. More specifically, when a predetermined variation type data value (03H, 05H, 07H) is selected, a variation pattern type with a shorter variation time is selected as the number of held balls increases. there is

By configuring in this way, when there are many held balls (that is, the variation pattern performance is continuous), it is possible to suppress the fact that only the variation pattern performance that results in a long fluctuation time and is lost continues. can be done. In general, the longer the variation time of the variation pattern presentation, the more likely the player will have a sense of expectation for the big win. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by making it difficult for long fluctuation times to continue.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the offset setting table 202e is used to determine the pattern selection offset value from the variation type data in order to select the variation pattern type according to the number of held balls. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of converting directly into an offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete without delay the process of determining the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game. Therefore, it takes time to determine the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, and the variation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. You can restrain yourself from giving.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when defining the data table of the state setting table 202h and the first winning random number table 202a on the program, a predetermined address such as the top address of the table, and A predetermined name (label) is associated with the number of types of data. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to directly describe the address value when configuring a program for reading out the predetermined address and the number of data of the data table in other processing. In particular, if the model changes, the processing contents and the number of data in the data table may change. Values and types of defined data may also change. Even in such a case, if a predetermined name (label) is associated with the address read out in other processing, when the program is diverted to another model, the predetermined address of the data table and the number of data types can be used. There is no need to retype the address of the data table or the number of data types in the description of the process that includes the control to read out, etc. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a program input error when diversion of the program, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in defining a predetermined name (label) in association with the number of types of data defined in the data table, a predetermined address in the data table is defined. It is specified using a label with This eliminates the need for the creator of the program to count the number of types of data defined in the data table and define the counted values in association with predetermined names (labels). That is, even if the predetermined address and the number of data types are changed due to the conversion of the program, etc., the number of data types is automatically calculated using the label as a value corresponding to the converted program. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a program input error when diversion of the program, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, even if the value of the variation type data selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same, the variation period of the variation pattern can be changed according to the number of held balls. For this reason, the offset setting table 202e defines different pattern selection offset values according to the number of balls on hold. Then, according to the pattern selection offset value, different variation pattern types are selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11).

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the offset setting table 202e defines a one-to-one correspondence between the variation type data and the pattern selection offset value. That is, when the same variation type data is selected, the same pattern selection offset value is selected regardless of the number of held balls. In this embodiment, the data structure of the pattern selection offset value is discriminated, and if the data structure has a predetermined data structure, the pattern selection offset value is converted to a new offset value. Then, based on the offset value, the variation pattern type is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11). In other words, instead of prescribing the offset value for the number of reserved balls in the offset selection table 202e, the program determines whether or not to convert to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls. As a result, the data capacity of the offset setting table 202e can be reduced compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. It should be noted that determination of whether or not there is a "predetermined data configuration" is made by determining whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1 or not. Then, when it is determined that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1, the program executes a conversion of adding the number of pending balls to the value with the most significant bit set to 0.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that, in the main controller 110, the content of the offset setting table 202e of the ROM 202 is partially changed. And part of the processing included in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the main controller 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in . Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 60, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the offset setting table 202e in this embodiment. In the offset setting table 202e in the first embodiment, when the variation type data value is "03H", "05H", "07H", different pattern selection offset values are selected according to the number of held balls. However, in this embodiment, the variation type data value and the pattern selection offset value are configured to have a one-to-one correspondence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, when the fluctuation type data values are "00H" to "02H", "04H", "06H", and "08H" to "09H", the pattern selection offset values are The same values as in the first embodiment are associated and defined. That is, for each variation type data, as pattern selection offset values, "00H (00000000B in binary notation)" to "02H (00000010B in binary notation)", "07H (00000111B in binary notation)", "0CH (00001100B in binary notation)", "11H (00010001B in binary notation)" to "13H (00010011B in binary notation)" are associated with each other. In other words, the pattern selection offset value corresponding to each variation type data is data with the most significant bit being "0".

On the other hand, the pattern selection offset value associated with the value "03H" of the variation type data is "83H (10000011B in binary notation)", and the pattern associated with the value "05H" of the variation type data The selection offset value is "88H (10001000B in binary notation)", and the pattern selection offset value associated with the variation type data value "07H" is "8DH (10010001B in binary notation)". That is, the pattern offset values corresponding to the variation type data "03H", "05H", "07H" (that is, variation type data with different variation pattern types selected according to the number of held balls) are all the most significant bits is data of "1".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1" in the later-described loss time setting process 2 (see FIG. 62), and the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) to calculate an offset value for identifying the variation pattern type. That is, if the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", the data "1" stored in the most significant bit is cleared, and a numerical value corresponding to the number of pending balls is added (pattern selection offset It is configured to convert the value into a value according to the number of held balls). Since it is not necessary to define the data for the number of pending balls in the offset setting table 202e, the amount of data in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. Also, whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of held balls is determined by setting the most significant bit (empty bit) of the pattern selection offset value, which was not used in the first embodiment, to "1" as data. This is done depending on whether it is stored or not. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to convert to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls without increasing the number of bits of the pattern selection offset value.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the information corresponding to the offset value for selecting the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f is configured to be stored in the lower bits of each pattern selection offset (upper bits does not store information corresponding to the offset), it is possible to use the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset to determine whether to perform conversion according to the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to convert to a value corresponding to the number of pending balls depending on whether or not "1" is stored as data in the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be stored in the 6th bit or the like.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. First, FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main controller 110, and as described above, the special symbol reserved ball storage area Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 .

Of the jackpot determination process (S208), the processes of S301 to S308 and S310 are the same as the processes of S301 to S308 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. executed. Then, in the big hit determination process in the second embodiment, a loss time setting process 2 (S311) is executed instead of the loss time setting process (S309) in the first embodiment. That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the second embodiment, in the process of S307, it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 does not match any of the random numbers defined in the comparison source table. If so (S307: No), the setting process 2 at the time of deviation is executed (S311), and the process proceeds to S310. This loss time setting process 2 is, like the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, a process for setting the aspect of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the setting process 2 (S311) at the time of deviation will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the setting process 2 (S311) at the time of deviation. This loss time setting process 2 (S311) is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 during the big hit determination process (see FIG. 61), and as described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is out. This is a process for setting the aspect of the variation pattern.

In the processes of S601 and S604 of the setting process 2 (S311) at the time of deviation, the same processes as the processes of S601 and S604 of the setting process at the time of deviation (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed. be done. Then, in the failure setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment, in the process of S601, when fluctuation type data is selected from the fluctuation type selection table 202d based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S601), next, Based on the selected variation type data, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the offset setting table 202e (S611), and it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the determined pattern selection offset value is "1" (S612). . Then, when it is determined that the most significant bit is "1" (S612: Yes), after clearing the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value to "0", the pattern selection offset value is the current holding ball The number (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c) is added and set as a new offset value (S613), and the process proceeds to S615.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S612 that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is not "1" (that is, it is "0") (S612: No), the pattern selection offset value determined in the process of S611 is set as it is as an offset value (S614), and the process proceeds to S615. In the process of S615, with respect to 1AF5H, which is the top address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, the variation pattern type defined in the address ahead by the offset value set in the process of S613 or S614 is the variation to be executed this time. It is selected as the variation pattern type of the pattern effect (S615). After the process of S615, the process proceeds to S604.

Thus, in the process of S612, it is determined whether the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", and if the most significant bit is "1", it is converted into a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls. By configuring as above, the number of data specified in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is defined to be "1" in the variation pattern type that varies the variation time according to the number of held balls. there is Also, when selecting the variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e, based on whether the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", the number of pending balls It is configured to determine whether or not to convert to a corresponding value. With this configuration, it is not necessary to define pattern selection offset values for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, so the amount of data defined in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the increase in capacity of the ROM 202, the production cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the offset setting table 202e is used to determine the pattern selection offset value from the variation type data. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of converting directly into an offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete without delay the process of determining the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game. Therefore, it takes time to determine the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, and the variation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. You can restrain yourself from giving.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 79. FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 202f is used for each of the big hit, the loss when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, and the loss when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b. It was configured such that the variation pattern type was selected. Also, in some deviations, even if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same, it is configured such that different modes of variation pattern rendering are set according to the number of held balls.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, different variation pattern types are selected based on the previous big win type (first symbol type) and the number of special symbol lotteries after the big win. It is As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation of the variation pattern presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, whether or not to shift to a high-probability state of special symbols after the end of the big win is informed based on the contents of the performance executed during a predetermined period after the end of the big win. It is configured as follows. Specifically, during the period from the end of the big win to the end of the special symbol lottery ten times, the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect in which the display image is ranked up, and the rank is maximized. When it becomes, it is notified that it has moved to a high probability state of special symbols. More specifically, in the third pattern display device 81, the plant displayed on the screen is produced to grow, and when the plant has fully grown and flowers have bloomed, it has shifted to a high probability state of the special pattern. It is configured to notify the user (see FIGS. 71 to 75). In this way, by executing the rank-up effect for a predetermined period, the player can be made happy and sad about the result of each effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the main controller 110 includes a first win type selection table 202b, a variation type selection table 202d, an offset The contents of the setting table 202e and the variation pattern selection table 202f have been partially changed, and a loss selection table 202j has been newly added. is added, a rank information storage area 223e is added to the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 24) includes The partial processing differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and the partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. This is the difference from the machine 10 . Other configurations, other processing executed by the main controller 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in . Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 70. FIG. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with a win type storage area 203f and a variation counter 203g. It is The hit type storage area 203f is an area for storing data corresponding to the jackpot type, and the previous jackpot type can be specified based on the data stored in this area. Further, the fluctuation number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the big win, and is cleared to 0 each time the big win is won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is provided with a rank information storage area 223e. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, an effect is executed in which the display image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is ranked up. Data for specifying this rank is stored in the rank information storage area 223e, and based on the stored data, control is performed so that an appropriate effect corresponding to the current rank is executed.

64 to 70 are block diagrams showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment and diagrams showing various data defined in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, in addition to the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, a detachment selection table 202j is provided. Although the details will be described later, this off-time selection table 202j selects from a plurality of tables defined in the variation type selection table 202d, the previous jackpot type (first symbol type) and the special symbol executed after the jackpot. This is a table used to select one table according to the number of lotteries.

Next, with reference to FIG.64(b), the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in this embodiment is demonstrated. In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, 14 types of “shorter time jackpot A” to “shorter time jackpot C”, “probable variable jackpot A” to “probable variable jackpot H”, “latent probability variable jackpot A” to “latent probability variable jackpot C” A jackpot is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", the "time saving jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first per type counter C2 If is in the range of “70 to 89”, “Time saving jackpot B” is selected, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “90 to 99”, “Time saving jackpot C” is selected be done.

In addition, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "100 to 101", "probability variable jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "102 to 106" In the case, "probable variable jackpot B" is selected, and when the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "107 to 111", "probable variable jackpot C" is selected, and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "112 to 126", the "probability variable jackpot D" is selected. Furthermore, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of ``127 to 141'', the ``variable probability jackpot E'' is selected, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of ``142 to 151''. In the case, "variable probability jackpot F" is selected, and when the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "152 to 161", "variable probability jackpot G" is selected, and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "162 to 171", "probability variable jackpot H" is selected.

Then, when the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "172 to 176", "latency probability variable jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "177 to 186" If there is, "latent probability variable jackpot B" is selected, and if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "187 to 199", "latency probability variable jackpot A" is selected.

In addition, "time saving jackpot A" to "time saving jackpot C" are different from each other in the selection method of the variation pattern type after the jackpot ends, but other than that (the number of rounds of the jackpot, the number of time saving times of normal patterns, etc.) It is the same as the "jackpot A (time saving jackpot)" of the second embodiment. In addition, for “variable probability jackpot A” to “variable probability jackpot H”, the method of selecting the variation pattern type after the jackpot is different from each other, but other operations such as the number of rounds of the jackpot are the same as the “jackpot B” of the second embodiment. (Variable jackpot)". Similarly, for the “latent probability variable jackpot A” to “latency probability variable jackpot C”, the operations other than the method of selecting the variation pattern type are the same as the “jackpot C (latency variable jackpot)” of the second embodiment.

In this way, by providing a wide variety of jackpots with different selection methods of variation pattern types, various variation pattern performances can be executed, so that the performance can be prevented from becoming monotonous. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, a variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation type selection table 202d. In the variation type selection table 202d of the second embodiment, three types of tables, a selection table for winning 202d1, a selection table for special figure 1 loss 202d2, and a selection table for special figure 2 loss 202d3, were defined. In this embodiment, in addition to the above three types of tables, a latency period selection table 202d4, a promotion period selection table 202d5, a promotion period selection table 202d6, a promotion period selection table 202d7, a promotion period selection table 202d8, and a promotion period selection table 202d8. Nine types of tables are provided: a selection table for period 202d9, a selection table for promotion period 202d10, a selection table for end of promotion period 202d11, and a selection table for end of promotion period 202d12.

The latent selection table 202d4 shifts to a special symbol high probability state after the end of the big win, but the player is not notified of the transition to the special symbol high probability state in the rank-up effect. In this case, it is a table used for selecting the aspect of the variation effect when the rank-up effect ends.

Also, the promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table referred to during the period in which the rank-up effect is executed, and is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the rank-up is not selected. On the other hand, the promotion period selection table 202d6 is a table in which the probability of selecting the variation type data corresponding to rank up is set to a low probability (30%). In the promotion period selection table 202d7, the probability that the variation type data corresponding to rank up is selected is set to be medium (50%), and in the promotion period selection table 202d8, the variation corresponding to rank up The probability that type data will be selected is set to a high probability (70%), and the promotion period selection table 202d9 sets the probability that variation type data corresponding to rank up will be selected to the maximum (90%). ing. In addition, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect of rapidly increasing the rank to the maximum rank is always selected regardless of the current rank situation.

The selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect informing that the rank has not been raised to the maximum in the rank-up effect is always selected. The selection table 202d12 is a table that always selects the variation type data corresponding to the effect for notifying that the player has been ranked up to the maximum rank in the rank-up effect (that is, that the game has shifted to the high-probability state of the special symbol). By selecting each of these tables according to the jackpot type and the number of special symbol lotteries after the jackpot ends, a wide variety of effects can be executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 65, in order to simplify the explanation, No. is assigned to each table. 0 to No. Although 11 numbers are associated with each other, in an actual program, different labels are associated with the leading addresses of each table. Then, when reading the tables in other processing, each table is read by the label associated with each table. As a result, when reusing a program, it is only necessary to change the definition of the label, and there is no need to modify the program for each process of reading the table. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the provision of incorrect data. Examples of label names associated with each table are “C_TBL0” to “C_TBL11”.

Next, referring to FIG. 66(a), after the end of the jackpot, the state is shifted to the special symbol high probability state. The details of the latent time selection table 202d4 used for selecting the variation pattern type at the time of deviation when no notification is given will be given. FIG. 66(a) is a diagram showing values of variation type data selected for each value of the variation type counter CS1 defined in the selection table for latency 202d4. As shown in FIG. 66(a), if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, "07H" is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 174 For example, if "08H" is selected as the variation type data and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 175 to 189, "09H" is selected as the variation type data and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 190 to 199. , "0AH" is selected as the fluctuation type data.

This latent time selection table 202d4 has a low selection ratio of "07H", which is the variation type data corresponding to complete loss, compared to the special figure 2 loss selection table 202d3 (Fig. 9(b)). The rate of selection of the variation type data corresponding to the outlier short reach, the outlier long reach, and the outlier super reach is set high. In other words, when the latent period selection table 202d4 is selected, a variation pattern type with a long variation time is likely to be selected. As a result, even if the transition to the high probability state of the special pattern is not notified in the rank-up performance, the transition to the high probability state of the special pattern is internally performed by continuing the variation pattern performance with the long variation period. It is possible to make the player expect to be there. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66(b), the promotion period selection table 202d5, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. This promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which rank-up does not occur. As shown in FIG. 66(b), if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 99, it corresponds to the variation pattern type (short variation for promotion period) that has a short variation time and fails to rank up. If "0BH", which is the variation type data to be used, is selected, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 100 to 199, the variation pattern type that has a relatively long variation time and fails to rank up (for the promotion period "0CH", which is the variation type data corresponding to the long variation A), is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 66(c), the promotion period selection table 202d6, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. This promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which the probability of rank-up occurring is set to a low probability (30%). As shown in FIG. 66(c), if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 79, it corresponds to the variation pattern type (short variation for promotion period) that has a short variation time and fails to rank up. If "0BH", which is the variation type data to be used, is selected and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 80 to 139, the variation pattern type that has a relatively long variation time and fails to rank up (for the promotion period "0CH", which is the variation type data corresponding to middle variation A), is selected. In addition, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 140 to 199, the variation type data corresponds to the variation type (promotion period middle variation B) in which the variation time is relatively long and the rank up is successful. "0DH" is selected.

Note that the promotion period selection table 202d7 to promotion period selection table 202d9 are fluctuation type data corresponding to the fluctuation type (promotion period middle fluctuation B) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank up is successful. Since the ratio of selecting "0DH" only increases, illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67(a), the promotion period selection table 202d10, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which the type of change to be ranked up to the highest rank is selected regardless of the current rank. As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the promotion period selection table 202d10 is selected, all the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 correspond to the fluctuation type (promotion period long fluctuation A) that ranks up to the highest rank. "0EH", which is the variation type data to be used, is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67(b), the selection table 202d11 for end of the promotion period, which is a table referred to when the rank-up effect ends, will be described. As described above, the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect informing that the rank has not been raised to the maximum is always selected in the rank-up effect. As shown in FIG. 67(b), when the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is selected, all the values of the variation type counter CS1 are changed to notify that the rank has not been increased to the maximum rank. “0FH”, which is the variation type data corresponding to (promotion period long variation B), is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67(c), the selection table 202d12 for end of the promotion period, which is a table referred to when the rank-up effect ends, will be described. As described above, the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period always selects the variation type data corresponding to the effect for notifying that the rank has been upgraded to the maximum rank (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol). table. As shown in FIG. 67(c), when the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period is selected, the variation type (promotion period "10H", which is the fluctuation type data corresponding to the long fluctuation C), is selected.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that various variation pattern effects are selected according to the game situation by referring to the various tables described above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the configuration of this offset setting table 202e. As shown in FIG. 68, the offset setting table 202e in the third embodiment includes, in addition to the offset setting table 202e in the second embodiment, a pattern selection offset value corresponding to the variation type selected during the rank-up period, and a variation A correspondence relationship with the value of the type data is defined. More specifically, the pattern selection offset value "14H" is associated with the variation type data value "0BH", and the pattern selection offset value "15H" is associated with the variation type data value "0CH". The pattern selection offset value "16H" is associated with the variation type data value "0DH", and the pattern selection offset value "17H" is associated with the variation type data value "0EH". The pattern selection offset value “18H” is associated with the variation type data value “0FH”, and the pattern selection offset value “19H” is associated with the variation type data value “10H”. there is

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting the variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the configuration of this variation pattern selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 69, the variation pattern selection table 202f in the third embodiment defines, in addition to the variation pattern selection table 202f in the second embodiment, the variation pattern type selected during the rank-up period.

More specifically, address 1B09H defines a variation pattern type that has a variation time of 6 seconds and fails to rank up (promotion period short variation), and address 1B0AH defines a variation time of 8 seconds. and a variation pattern type that fails to rank up (promotion period middle variation A) is defined, and the variation pattern type that has a variation time of 9 seconds and succeeds in ranking up (promotion period middle variation B) is specified. Further, address 1B0CH defines a variation pattern type (promotion period long variation B) that has a variation time of 12 seconds and is promoted to the maximum rank, address 1B0DH has a variation time of 13 seconds, In addition, a variation pattern type (promotion period long variation B) for informing that the rank-up performance could not be promoted to the maximum rank is defined, and the address 1B0EH has a variation time of 14 seconds and a rank. A variation pattern type (promotion period long variation C) for notifying that the player has been promoted to the maximum rank in the up effect is defined.

In this way, by defining a wide variety of variation pattern types, it is possible to select various variation pattern types according to the state of the game, so it is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous. can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the off-time selection table 202j defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. This out-time selection table 202j includes, for each type of previous jackpot, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot (the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot) and a table referred to for selecting the change type data. It is a table that defines relationships. In FIG. 70, "No." represents the "No." assigned to each table defined in the variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 65).

As shown in FIG. 70, for example, if the previous jackpot was "time-saving jackpot A", after the time-shortening jackpot A ends, until the special pattern lottery ends 9 times, the special pattern lottery Every time it is out, No. is selected from the variation type selection table 202d. 5 is read out and referred to for selecting fluctuation type data. In addition, No. The table of 5 means the promotion period selection table 202d6, so in the lottery for each special symbol, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, there is an effect that the rank is successful only at a probability of 30%. Not done. Also, in the 10th special design lottery, No. 10 tables are read out and referred to in order to select fluctuation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 10 means the promotion period end selection table 202d11, an effect for informing that the rank could not be increased to the maximum rank is performed in the variation pattern effect. In the lottery for the special symbols from the 11th time onwards, No. 1 table, or No. 2 (that is, either the selection table 202d2 for the special figure 1 or the selection table 202d3 for the special figure 2) is read and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

Also, for example, if the previous big hit was "probability variable jackpot D", after the probability variable jackpot D ends, until the special symbol lottery ends 9 times, every time the special symbol lottery is lost, the variation From the type selection table 202d, No. 7 is read out and referred to for selecting fluctuation type data. In addition, No. The table of 7 means the promotion period selection table 202d8, so in the lottery for each special symbol, the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 has a probability of 70% to succeed in increasing the rank. will be Also, in the 10th special symbol lottery, No. 11 tables are read out and referred to for selecting fluctuation type data. In addition, No. The table of 11 means the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period, so in the variation pattern production, it is possible to rank up to the maximum rank (that is, to move to a high probability state of special symbols). is performed. In the lottery for the special symbols from the 11th time onwards, No. 1 table, or No. 2 (that is, either the selection table 202d2 for the special figure 1 or the selection table 202d3 for the special figure 2) is read and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

Also, for example, if the previous big hit was "probability variable jackpot G", after the probability variable jackpot G is completed, until the lottery of special symbols is completed four times, each time the special symbol lottery is lost, it will change. From the type selection table 202d, No. 8 is read out and referred to for selecting fluctuation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 8 means the promotion period selection table 202d9, in the lottery for each special symbol, the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is performed with a probability of 90% to succeed in increasing the rank. will be Also, in the fifth special symbol lottery, No. 9 is read out and referred to for selecting fluctuation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 9 means the selection table 202d10 for the end of the promotion period, an effect of increasing the rank to the maximum rank is performed in the variation pattern effect. In the lottery for special symbols from the 6th time onwards, No. 1 table, or No. 2 (that is, either the selection table 202d2 for the special figure 1 or the selection table 202d3 for the special figure 2) is read and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

In addition, despite the previous jackpot being "short time jackpot A" to "short time jackpot C" and "latent probability variable jackpot A" to "latency probability variable jackpot C", so as not to go up to the highest rank by ranking up. In addition, the voice ramp control device 113 is configured so that the current rank can be grasped. Specifically, the current rank is determined based on the rank information stored in the rank information storage area 223e. Then, in a state where the rank information is one rank below the maximum rank, the variation pattern type corresponding to the rank up (that is, the long variation A for the promotion period with a variation time of 12 seconds) is changed by the variation pattern command. When notified, it is configured to select the mode of the variation pattern rendering that fails to rank up with the same variation time (12 seconds). Then, based on the selected mode, a display variation pattern command is set.

Also, although not shown in the drawing, the selection table 202j for the time of failure includes the number of lotteries of special symbols when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed, and the table to be selected. It also stipulates the correspondence between As a control when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) pressed, for example, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries, until the first jackpot is won, selection for special figure 1 out Either the table 202d2 or the selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 omission is configured to be selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the rank-up effect immediately after turning on the power (that is, the low probability state of the special symbols and the normal state of the normal symbols). Therefore, although there is no possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol, the rank-up production is generated, and the player is confused, or it becomes difficult to have expectations for the rank-up production. can be suppressed.

Note that the control when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed is not limited to this. For example, the variation type selection table 202d may be configured to display a dedicated variation pattern type by preparing a table that is selected only during the period until the first big win is won after the power is turned on. . In many cases, the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed when the hall is opened. The variation pattern type can be made to look forward to. Therefore, since the game can be started for the players immediately after opening the pachinko hall, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall can be improved.

Next, a specific example of the rank-up effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up period will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. In addition, in the rank-up effect of the present embodiment, the rank is set to D, which is the lowest rank, after the big win is completed. Then, every time a variation pattern type corresponding to a rank increase is selected, the rank is increased in the order of rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S. Also, if the rank is raised to rank S, the player is notified that the state has shifted to a high-probability state of special symbols.

FIG. 71(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol fluctuates in the case of rank D, which is the lowest rank, during the rank-up period. As shown in FIG. 71(a), "Rank D" is displayed in a rectangular area provided at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 during the variation of the third symbol. That is, the rectangular area provided on the upper left is an area for displaying the current rank information.

In addition, in the horizontally elongated substantially rectangular area provided in the upper center of the third pattern display device 81, "Ranked up with appearance of chance (341)" is displayed. By this display content, the player is informed that the player will be ranked up when a combination of "3", "4" and "1" appearing as chance eyes as a result of the variable pattern presentation. there is Therefore, it is possible for the player to play expecting that a chance eye will appear.

Further, in a rectangular area provided on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, "remaining 9 promotion chances" is displayed. This number is a number indicating how many times the rank-up period remains, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation pattern effect is executed.

Furthermore, an image of the ground is displayed on the lower right of the third pattern display device 81 . In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, plants grow on the ground according to the rank, and the plants bloom at the highest rank (see FIG. 74). In this way, the player can easily recognize the current rank by displaying a visually easy-to-understand effect.

FIG. 71(b) is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player does not rank up as a result of the variation pattern effect executed during the rank up period. As shown in FIG. 71(b), when the rank is not increased (that is, when the short fluctuation for the promotion period or the middle fluctuation for the promotion period A is selected as the fluctuation pattern type), the second chance "3 , "4", and "1" (in the example of FIG. 71B, the combination of "3," "8," and "1") are stop-displayed. In addition, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "Unfortunately..." are displayed to inform the player that the rank could not be increased.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when ranked up will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing display contents in the case of rank-up in rank D, which is the lowest rank. In the case of ranking up, first, symbols "3", "4", and "1", which are combinations of chance numbers, are displayed, and the ground displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. , an effect in which light shines in from above is displayed (see FIG. 72(a)). Then, along with the plant sprouts on the ground, "Ranked Up!!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 72(b)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been increased. Furthermore, "Rank D→C" is displayed in the upper left area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 72(b)). As a result, the player can easily understand that the rank has been increased from rank D to rank C by the current rank increase.

Next, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is upgraded from the rank C to the rank B will be described with reference to FIG. 73(a). As shown in FIG. 73(a), when rank C is upgraded to rank B, the sprout displayed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 grows. Specifically, as the number of plant leaves increases to four, the total length of the plant approximately doubles. In addition, in the area provided in the upper center of the third pattern display device 81, "Rank up!" Also, in the area provided on the upper left of the third pattern display device 81, "Rank C→B" is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that he or she has been raised to rank B by this rank-up. Although illustration is omitted, an effect is performed in which light shines from above onto the buds of the plants before the plants grow. In other words, even when the player is ranked up to rank B, an effect similar to that shown in FIG. 72(a) is performed. It should be noted that similar effects are performed when the player is ranked up to rank A or rank S, but the illustration is omitted.

Next, the case of upgrading from rank B to rank A will be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). As shown in FIG. 73(b), when rank B is upgraded to rank A, the plant displayed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 grows further, and a flower bud is displayed at the tip of the plant. be done. In addition, in the area provided in the upper center of the third pattern display device 81, "Rank up!" Also, in the area provided on the upper left of the third pattern display device 81, "Rank B→A" is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to A by the rank-up this time.

Next, the case of upgrading from rank A to rank S will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 74, when rank A is upgraded to rank S, the plant displayed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed in bloom. In addition, in the area provided in the upper center of the third pattern display device 81, "Rank up!" Also, in the area provided on the upper left of the third pattern display device 81, "Rank A→S" is displayed. Thus, the player can easily recognize that he/she has been raised to rank S by the rank-up this time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern effect executed at the end of the rank-up period will be described. FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is increased to the highest rank, and FIG. 75(b) is a diagram when the rank is not increased to the highest rank. 2 is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), when informing the player that the player has been ranked up to the highest rank and has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol, "3", "3", and "3" are set as the third symbol as the stop symbol. A chance number consisting of a combination of "4" and "1" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the blooming plant on the right side shines. In addition, in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "probability change rush!" is displayed. Actually, when the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a state of high probability of special symbols, but the display of the words "promotion" prompts the player to launch the ball during the rank-up period. Depending on the timing, etc., it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she has transitioned to a high-probability state of the special pattern by itself. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75(b), when the maximum rank cannot be reached during the rank-up period, a stop symbol other than the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the third symbol stop symbol. (a combination of "3", "5", and "1" in the example of FIG. 75(b)), and the right plant is displayed withered. In addition, in the area provided in the upper center of the third pattern display device 81, the characters "promotion failure ..." are displayed, and in the upper right area of the third pattern display device 81, "promotion chance remaining These displays, in which characters "0 times" are displayed, can make the player recognize that the player has not been able to rank up to the maximum rank.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main controller 110, and as described above, the special symbol reserved ball storage area Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 .

Of this jackpot determination process (S208), in each process of S301 to S307 and S310, the same process as each process of S301 to S307 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is performed. executed. Then, in the jackpot determination process in the third embodiment, instead of the jackpot time setting process (S308) and the loss time setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment, the jackpot time setting process 2 (S321) and the time of loss A setting process 3 (S322) is executed.

That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the third embodiment, in the process of S307, it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches one of the random numbers defined in the comparison source table. In this case (S307: Yes), the big hit time setting process 2 (S321) is executed, and the process proceeds to S310. This jackpot time setting process 2, like the jackpot time setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, is a process for setting the aspect of the variation pattern when a special symbol jackpot is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S307, if it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 does not match any of the random numbers defined in the comparison source table (S307: No), the setting process for failure 3 is executed (S322), and the process proceeds to S310. This loss time setting process 3 is, like the loss time setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, a process for setting the aspect of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the above-described jackpot time setting process 2 (S321) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this big win time setting process 2 (S321). Of this jackpot time setting process 2 (S321), in each process of S401 to S408, the same process as the jackpot time setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the jackpot time setting process 2 in the third embodiment, after the jackpot type is determined in the process of S402, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the hit type storage area 203f (S411). Here, as the data according to the jackpot type, for example, values from "00H" to "0DH" are assigned in order of the jackpot types defined in the first hit type selection table 202b, and assigned to the jackpot type this time. The obtained value may be stored in the win type storage area 203f.

Next, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g is cleared (S412), and the process proceeds to S403. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to determine the type of variation pattern based on the data corresponding to the jackpot type stored in the winning type storage area 203f and the value of the variation counter 203g. there is

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the above-described misalignment setting process 2 (S311) will be described. Loss time setting process is a process executed in the big hit determination process (see FIG. 61) by MPU 201 of main control device 110, and as described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is off, the mode of the variation pattern is changed. This is the processing for setting. In the processes of S601, S604, and S611 to S613 of the deviation setting process 3 (S322), the same processes as the deviation setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment are executed. Then, in the failure setting process 3 in the third embodiment, first, 1 is added to the value of the change number counter 203g (S621). Then, based on the value of the variation counter 203g after incrementing 1 and information based on the previous jackpot type stored in the win type storage area 203f, the table to be referred to is changed based on the selection table 202j at the time of failure. Select from the type selection table 202d (S622). Then, when the process of S622 ends, the process proceeds to S601. By the processing of S621 and S622, various variation patterns can be executed based on the jackpot type of the jackpot won last time and the number of lottery times of the special symbols executed after the jackpot is finished. Interest in games can be improved.

It should be noted that the loss setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) of the present embodiment is based on the information stored in the win type storage area 202f and the value of the change number counter 202g regardless of the state of the gaming machine. Although it is configured to select a table for selecting type data, only the high probability state of the special design or the time saving state of the normal design is hit, and the information stored in the type storage area 202f and the variation counter 202g A table for selecting the variation type data may be selected based on the value of . In other words, when the special symbol lottery is lost in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the selection table 202d2 for special figure 1 or the selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 or may be configured to be selected. Thereby, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, a table for selecting the variation type data based only on the type of the entrance into which the ball enters is selected from the variation type selection table 202d. Therefore, the judgment conditions can be reduced. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the variable display setting process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) of the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process for generating and setting display variation pattern commands based on the variation pattern commands received from the control device 110 .

In each of S1901 to S1903 and S1905 to S1910 of the variable display setting process (S1712), the same processes as those of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed. . Then, in the command determination process in the third embodiment, in the process of S1903, when obtaining a variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 (S1903), the extracted variation pattern and the rank information storage area 223e and based on the information on the current rank stored in 223e, a variation pattern command for display corresponding to an appropriate variation pattern effect corresponding to the rank is set (S1911). After the process of S1911 ends, the process proceeds to S1905.

By setting the display variation pattern command in consideration of the information about the rank stored in the rank information storage area 223e, an appropriate display effect corresponding to the rank is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the rank-up effect. can be made

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 84. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is lost, the variation pattern differs according to the previous big win type and the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the big win. It was configured so that the type was selected. In this modified example, in addition to this, a different variation pattern type is selected according to the variation pattern type selected when the previous big hit is announced. As a result, variation pattern effects can be executed in a wider variety of modes than the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, referring to FIG. 80, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is shown. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment. In this modification, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a variation type storage area 203h for storing information identifying the variation pattern type when notifying the previous jackpot. There is a difference. Details will be described later, but when the special symbol lottery is lost, the variation pattern type is set based on the information stored in the variation type storage area 203h. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment.

Next, a variation type selection table 202d in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(a) is a diagram showing a variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 81(a), in this modified example, No. 13, a special mode selection table 202d13 is added. Although the details will be described later, the special mode selection table 202d13 indicates that when the variation pattern effect at the time of notifying the previous big win is executed in the so-called premium ready-to-win mode, the variation pattern effect after the big win is executed. It is a table referred to when selecting an aspect. This special mode selection table is a table that may be selected after the end of the big win when winning a big win that shifts to a high probability state of special symbols, and the change time is extremely short (for example, 0.00). 5 seconds) Variation type data corresponding to the variation pattern type is defined.

Also, instead of the winning selection table 202d1 in the third embodiment, No. 13, No. 14 are added a selection table 202d14 for non-probability hit and a selection table 202d15 for probability hit. In this modified example, the variable type data is selected from different tables depending on whether or not the probability variable jackpots A to H are won. Furthermore, only the table referred to at the time of the probability variable jackpot defines the variation type data corresponding to the winning premium reach. As a result, the premium reach occurs only in the case of the probability variable jackpot, so the player who recognizes that the reach this time is the premium reach recognizes that the change pattern shifts to the high probability state of the special pattern during the variable pattern presentation. be able to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when the hit premium reach is set, as the display effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, a plant blooming effect may be executed. Normally, it is notified whether the plant has flowered during the rank-up period after the jackpot ends, whether or not it has transitioned to a high-probability state of a special pattern, but when the hit premium reach is displayed, A production in which plants bloom will be displayed before entering the rank-up period. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol high-probability state will be entered after the big win is completed before the big win state is entered.

FIG. 81(b) is a diagram showing a non-variable winning selection table 202d14 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 81(b), in the non-probability variation selection table 202d14, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H is the variation type data corresponding to the short reach. When it is selected and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the winning long reach, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 180 to 199 , 02H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the hit super reach.

Moreover, FIG.81(c) is a figure which shows the selection table 202d15 for probability variable hits of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the non-probable variable winning selection table 202d15, when the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, 01H is selected as the variable type data corresponding to the winning long reach. When it is selected and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 169, 02H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the winning super reach, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 170 to 199 , 11H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the hit premium reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the detachment selection table 202j of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a selection table 202j at the time of deviation according to this modified example. As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when the previous jackpot was various probability variable jackpots, the variation pattern type selected after the jackpot ends according to the variation pattern in which the jackpot was notified is different. Specifically, the previous jackpot type is jackpot A, and the variation pattern types selected when announcing the jackpot are "win short reach", "win long reach", and "win super reach" (non-premium reach). , the same table as the off-time selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

On the other hand, if the previous jackpot type is jackpot A and the variation pattern type selected when notifying the jackpot is "winning premium reach", regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the jackpot ends, No. 12 tables are selected. That is, the variation type data is selected from the special mode selection table 202d13. As described above, the special mode selection table 202d13 defines variation type data corresponding to variation pattern types with an extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Since the game is executed immediately, the game can be progressed speedily. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the sensible time until the next big win, so that the player can feel that the big wins have continued at very short intervals in the high probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, regarding the probability variable jackpots B to H, as with the probability variable jackpot A, the variation pattern type selected when notifying the jackpot is “hit short reach”, “hit long reach”, “hit super reach” (non-premium reach ), the same table as the off-time selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variation type selection table 202d. Then, when the variation pattern type selected when notifying the big win is "winning premium reach", No. 1 is selected regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win. 12 tables are selected. Also, although not shown in the drawings, if the previous jackpot is a short-time jackpot A to C and a latent probability variable jackpot A to C, regardless of the type of variation pattern when notifying the jackpot, the third implementation The same table as the selection table 202j at the time of deviation in the form is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

In this modification, the table selected after the end of the big win notified by the winning premium reach is the special mode selection table 202d13 regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries, and the variation time is extremely short (for example, 0.5 seconds). ) was configured to be executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a variation pattern type with a relatively long variation time (for example, 20 seconds) is selected. Further, as a display effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display effect peculiar to (special mode) after the end of the big win notified by the winning premium reach may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to play the game with the pleasure of watching a unique effect that is displayed only in the special mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As an example of the display effect in the variation pattern effect that is executed after the big win, for example, it may be configured to execute the effect that the flowered plant bears fruit. That is, if the fruit bears fruit, it indicates that the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit, and if the fruit does not bear fruit, it indicates that the special pattern lottery is lost. By constructing in this way, the winning premium reach is executed, the transition to the high probability state of the special pattern after the end of the big win, and the story in the flow until the big win is won in the high probability state of the special pattern. A series of display effects can be executed. In addition, in order to further enhance the relevance of the effects, the display effects during the big win may also be related to plants. For example, if a production of plants blooming by winning premium reach is performed and a jackpot is announced, fireworks will be set off in the background to celebrate the flowering of the plants in the notified jackpot. good. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to understand the connection between the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the hit premium reach and the variation pattern effect after the big win. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this modification, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot A to H, the variable pattern effect can be selected in the form of a winning premium reach. , the winning premium reach may be selected only in the probability variable jackpot A). That is, in the variation type selection table 202d, for example, even in the case of the probability variation jackpot B~H, the variation type data is selected by referring to the non-probability variation hit selection table 202d14, and only in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the probability variation hit selection The configuration may be such that the table 202d15 is selected. In addition, a dedicated table for the probability variable jackpots B to H is provided, and the mode of premium reach is not selected, but the variation type data is selected in a different form from the time-saving jackpots A to C and the latent probability variable jackpots A to C. can be configured to In this way, if the winning premium reach is selected only for some of the probability variable jackpots A to H (for example, the jackpot A), the winning premium reach and the state after the jackpot A ends (special mode) can be made rare. Therefore, when a winning premium reach or a special mode appears, the player can be given a great sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 of this modification will be described. First, FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the jackpot determination process (S208) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. Of the jackpot determination processing of this modification, in each processing of S301 to S307, S310, and S321, the same processing as each of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 of the jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 76) in the third embodiment is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot determination process of this modified example, the result of comparing the random value defined in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first winning random number counter buffer , when it is determined that there is no matching random value (S307: No), instead of the failure setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment, the failure setting process 4 is executed (S331), The process proceeds to S310. This loss time setting process 4 is a process for setting a variation pattern type for notifying that the special symbol lottery is lost. The details of the setting process 4 at the time of deviation will be described with reference to FIG. 84 that follows.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing setting processing 4 at time of deviation. In this off-time setting process 4, in each of the processes of S601, S604, S611 to S614, and S621, the same process as the off-time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment is executed. In addition, in the setting process 4 at the time of deviation of this modification, in the process of S621, if 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g (S621), then the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g, the previous jackpot type, Based on the variation pattern type at the time of announcing the previous big win, the table specified at the corresponding position in the selection table 202j for the time of failure is selected (S631). It should be noted that the variation pattern type at the time when the previous big win was notified is discriminated based on the information stored in the variation type storage area 202h. Specifically, when selecting the variation pattern type of the jackpot, for example, a pattern selection offset value is stored as information that can specify the variation pattern type. After the process of S631 is completed, the process proceeds to S601.

With this failure time setting process 4, it is possible to select the variation pattern type by referring to the variation pattern type at the time of the previous big win in addition to the previous big win type and the number of lotteries of special symbols, so that the third embodiment. A variety of variation pattern performances can be executed more than the pachinko machine 10 of . Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

It should be noted that the setting process 4 at the time of loss of this modification (see FIG. 84) is, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the information stored in the winning type storage area 202f, the value of the variation number counter 202g, and the variation type storage area Based on the information on the variation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in 202h, it is configured to select a table for selecting variation type data, but the high probability state of special symbols or the normal symbol Information stored in the type storage area 202f only in the time saving state, the value of the variation counter 202g, and the information on the variation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in the variation type storage area 202h Change the variation type data based on It may be configured to select a table for selection. In other words, when the special symbol lottery is lost in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the selection table 202d2 for special figure 1 or the selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 or may be configured to be selected. Thereby, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, a table for selecting the variation type data based only on the type of the entrance into which the ball enters is selected from the variation type selection table 202d. Therefore, the judgment conditions can be reduced. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and its modification, in setting the variation pattern effect, not only the lottery result of the special symbol and the ball entrance where the ball entered, but also the previous winning A table is selected based on the jackpot type and the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot ends. As a result, it is possible to execute a wide variety of variation pattern effects, so that it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and its modified example, similarly to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the offset setting table 202e is used to determine the pattern selection offset value from the variation type data. . In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of converting directly into an offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete without delay the process of determining the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game. Therefore, it takes time to determine the aspect of the variation pattern presentation, and the variation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. You can restrain yourself from giving.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and its modified example, the rank-up effect is continued until the lottery of special symbols is performed ten times at maximum, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until the lottery is performed 4 times, or may be configured to continue until the lottery of special symbols is performed 20 times.

In addition, in the third embodiment and its modified example, five ranks of rank D, rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S were provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three levels of ranks may be provided, or ten levels of ranks may be provided. Moreover, it is not always necessary to increase the rank by one step, and a pattern of increasing the rank by two steps or by increasing the rank by three steps may be provided.

In the third embodiment and its modification, it is configured to notify that the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is made when the maximum rank is reached, but the content to be notified is limited to this. not a thing For example, it may be notified that a long period is selected as the period of time for normal symbols to be given after a big hit.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, the table selected from the variation type selection table 202d is configured not to change after the end of the rank-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery for special symbols is performed 100 times or more after the end of the big win, the table to be selected may be changed. Thus, when the variation pattern presentation is executed 100 times or more, a variation pattern presentation with a different mode is selected, so that the presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, for example, when the lottery of special symbols is performed 500 times or more, or 1000 times or more after the end of the big win, the table to be selected may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a variable pattern presentation mode that cannot be seen unless the lottery for the special symbol is out of 500 times or 1000 times or more in succession. Therefore, even if the special symbol lottery continues to be lost, the player can be motivated to continue playing the game by seeing different variation pattern performances.

In the third embodiment and its modification, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the table for selecting the variation type data is selected from the variation type selection table 202d based on the previous jackpot type. However, the table selection conditions are not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to select a table according to the time period in which the variation pattern effect is executed, the type of background image when executing, the remaining number of times of the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the like. As a result, the variation pattern presentation can be executed in various modes, so that the presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the third embodiment and its modification, it was configured to determine whether or not to execute the variation pattern type in the form of a premium reach when winning the probability variable jackpot A to H, but this is not the only option. Anything that notifies the player that the game will be in an advantageous state is acceptable. For example, if the result of the lottery this time is a big win and the winning of a big win is pending, the winning premium reach may be selected. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big wins will continue in an extremely short period of time by executing the variable pattern performance in the mode of winning premium reach, so that the player will feel great satisfaction. can give Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the modified example of the third embodiment, when the previous big win is a probability variable big win A to H, the lottery result of the special symbol after the big win is out according to the aspect of the variation pattern performance that notified the big win. Although the variation pattern type to be selected is configured to be different, it is not limited to this. For example, when short-time jackpot A is won by winning short reach or winning long reach, promotion period selection table 202d6 in which rank-up occurs with a low probability (30%) during the rank-up period is selected. , When the time-saving jackpot A is won by winning super reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 may be selected in which the rank-up occurs with a high probability (70%) during the rank-up period. Furthermore, for example, when winning the probability variable jackpot A by winning short reach or winning long reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which rank-up occurs with a high probability (70%) during the rank-up period is selected. It may be configured such that when winning the probability variable jackpot A by winning super reach, the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which rank-up occurs with a low probability (30%) during the rank-up period is selected.

By configuring in this way, when a big win is notified by winning short reach, the degree of expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d8 is selected increases as the rank increases, so the previous big win will change with certainty. It is possible to heighten expectations for the fact that it is a jackpot A (that is, the state of transition to a state of high probability of special symbols). In addition, when a big win is reported by the winning super reach, the degree of expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d6 is selected increases as the performance of failing to rank up occurs, so the previous big win is a certain variable big win A. It is possible to heighten the expectation for being (that is, moving to a high probability state of special symbols). That is, depending on the type of variation pattern when notifying the previous big win, the player is made to hope that the rank-up will occur frequently, or conversely, the player is made to hope that the rank-up will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to realize different game properties even with the same rank-up effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation type data is referred to for selecting the variation type data according to the type of ball entrance into which the ball entered, the number of held balls, etc. A different table is selected as the table, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, a different table is selected from the variation type selection table 202d according to the game situation. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation pattern presentation for notifying the big hit of the special symbol, so that the presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

Also, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big win is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of a big win until multiple (for example, two or three) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepachi, mamkyu, a game machine combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

As a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is not equipped with a ball launching handle. things are mentioned. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is encouraged to play the game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

It should be noted that a pachinko machine may be obtained by combining some or all of the above embodiments.

Below, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Set the data specified in the table using the label)
Control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, storage means for storing a plurality of information groups constituted by one or more information for the control means to perform control, and from the storage means, the control information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups to be used for control by means; and head position specifying means for indicating the head position of a predetermined information group among storage areas storing the plurality of information groups. A gaming machine A1, wherein said information group selecting means selects said one information group based on the leading position indicated by said leading position designating means.

According to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of information groups composed of one or more information for the control means to perform control are stored in the storage means, and one information group used for control by the control means is stored from the storage means. , is selected by the information group selection means. Among storage areas storing a plurality of information groups, the head position of a predetermined information group is indicated by the head position designating means, and based on the head position indicated by the head position designating means, the information group selecting means One information group is selected.

As a result, it is only necessary to read the head position of a predetermined information group in the control process for designating one information group, and the information constituting the information group need not be individually described in the program. Therefore, when diverting a program to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large amount of information on the program, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors in rewriting values. Therefore, there is an effect that malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the leading position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose leading position is indicated by the leading position designating means is determined. the head position of the predetermined information group indicated by the head position designating means; and the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designation means. and information number calculation means for calculating the number of information constituting the information group of the information group selection means, the head position specified by the head position designation means and the information calculated by the information number calculation means A game machine A2 characterized in that one of the information groups is selected from the number of .

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designation means is indicated by the designation means. Based on the head position of the predetermined information group indicated by the head position designating means and the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designating means, the information number calculating means selects the predetermined information group. The number of constituent information is calculated. One information group is selected by the information group selection means from the head position designated by the head position designation means and the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means.

As a result, it is not necessary to numerically specify the number of pieces of information forming an information group in a program. It is possible to omit the step of rewriting the number in the process using the number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning due to correction errors by the creator of the program.

In the gaming machine A2, the storage means comprises a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and each of the information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored one by one at the plurality of addresses. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information. At the plurality of addresses, each piece of information constituting a plurality of information groups is stored one by one.

As a result, the number of addresses in which information is stored matches the number of information constituting the information group, so that the number of information can be easily calculated by the information number calculating means based on the range of addresses in which information is stored. has the effect of being able to calculate

In the gaming machine A3, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the leading address of the plurality of addresses storing the plurality of information groups, and the leading position is A gaming machine A4, wherein specifying means and said specifying means specify a top address of said information group based on said identification data.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the leading address of a plurality of addresses storing a plurality of information groups, and based on the identification data, the leading position specifying means, and the specifying means specifies the top address of the information group.

As a result, the head position specifying means and the specifying means do not need to specify the head position by the address itself, so when the program is diverted to other models, even if the storage address of each information group is changed, , there is no need to rewrite the head position in the control processing program for reading out each information group. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to program rewriting errors.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, acquisition means for acquiring random information; comparison means for comparing the random information acquired by the acquisition means with the information group selected by the information group selection means; A gaming machine A5, characterized in that it comprises privilege game providing means for determining whether or not to award a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the comparison result by the comparison means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the information group selected by the information group selection means are compared by the comparison means, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is awarded based on the comparison result of the comparison means. Whether or not to play is determined by the privilege game providing means.

As a result, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not to award a privilege game, so there is an effect that the player can feel a sense of fairness.

In the gaming machine A5, the comparison means compares the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means with the random information in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored. Characterized game machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means is randomized in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored by the comparison means. Since it is compared, the information to be compared with the random information next can be identified by simple processing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when performing the comparison by the comparing means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A6, the comparison means compares the random information acquired by the acquisition means by the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means with the information selected by the information group selection means. A game machine A7 characterized in that it compares with each information constituting a group.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the random information acquired by the acquisition means the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means and the information group selection means select Since comparison with each information constituting the information group is performed by the comparison means, there is no need to perform processing for separately determining the number of times of comparison. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load at the time of comparison by the comparing means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when the bonus game awarding means decides to award the bonus game, the random information acquired by the acquisition means is erased before awarding the bonus game. A gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising erasing means for

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when the privilege game imparting means determines to impart the privilege game, the erasing means acquires the privilege game before imparting the privilege game Since the random information acquired by the means is erased, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the provision of the privilege game from being fraudulently acquired from the outside.

<Feature B group> (calculate the number of data using labels)
Control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, storage means for storing a plurality of information, and a part of the storage means, and a plurality of information used for control by the control means. and an information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups to be used for control by the control means from the storage area in which a plurality of information groups are stored. and in the storage area, each information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in order without an empty address in the plurality of addresses associated with the storage area. wherein the information group selection means selects the information group based on the head address of the predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number of the information groups. Game machine B1 to play.

According to the game machine B1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of pieces of information are stored by a storage means, and a plurality of information groups each composed of a plurality of pieces of information used for control by the control means are stored in a storage area which is a part of the storage means. One information group used for control by the control means is selected from the storage area by the information group selection means. All information groups are composed of the same number of specific pieces of information. In the storage area, each piece of information constituting a plurality of information groups is stored in order without an empty address in a plurality of addresses associated with the storage area. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the head address of the predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number.

As a result, the information group can be specified only by specifying the head address of the predetermined information group and the specific number, so it is not necessary to define the head position of each information group on the program. do not have. Therefore, when diverting the program to other models, it is not necessary to rewrite many values such as the head position of each information group on the program, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of value rewriting errors. Therefore, there is an effect that malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B1, among the plurality of information groups sequentially stored in the storage area, address specifying means for indicating the leading address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group; A game machine B2, further comprising specific number calculation means for calculating the specific number from the head address of the information group and the address indicated by the address designation means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the address designating means indicates the top address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group among the plurality of information groups sequentially stored in the storage area. A specific number is calculated by the specific number calculating means from the head address of the predetermined information group and the address indicated by the address designating means.

As a result, there is no need to enter the specific number of numbers in the program, so when the program is used for other models with different specific numbers, the specific number can be input in each process that performs control using the specific number. The process of repairing can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to an error in correcting the program.

In the game machine B1 or B2, identification information storage means for storing a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from the plurality of information groups, and identification information stored in the identification information storage means. and identification information selection means for selecting one identification data from the plurality of identification data, wherein the information group selection means selects the one identification data selected by the identification information selection means and the storage area A gaming machine B3, wherein the information group is selected based on the head address of the information group stored at the head of the game machine B3 and the specific number.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from a plurality of information groups are stored in the identification information storage means, and from the plurality of identification data stored in the identification information storage means, One piece of identification data is selected by the identification information selection means. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on one identification data selected by the identification information selection means, the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area, and the specific number.

As a result, when any of the information groups stored in the storage area is referenced in each control process, there is no need to individually identify and refer to the address where the information defined in the information group is stored. . Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting an information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In the game machine B3, the information group selection means advances the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area by a value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it selects the information group defined at the position of .

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, only the value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number is added to the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area. Since the information group defined in the previous position is selected by the information group selection means, the information group can be selected by simple processing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting an information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In any one of game machines B1 to B4, information storage means capable of storing information, and information storage control means for controlling to store one information group selected by the information group selection means in the information storage means. and wherein the control means performs control based on the information group stored in the information storage means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, one information group selected by the information group selection means is controlled to be stored in the information storage means by the information storage control means, and based on the information group stored in the information storage means, control is performed. Control is performed by means.

As a result, the control means can perform control based on the information group stored in advance in the information group storage means, and there is an effect that the processing load of the control means can be reduced.

The game machine B5 comprises a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game granting means for imparting a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information. The selection means selects the one identification data based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being the predetermined lottery result, and selects the one identification data selected by the identification information selection means. A gaming machine B6, further comprising holding means for holding information until a predetermined condition is established, wherein the information group selection means selects the information group based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on a predetermined lottery result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, the privilege game imparting means provides a privilege game advantageous to the player. Further, based on a predetermined result of the lottery performed by the lottery means, one identification data is selected by the identification information selection means, and the one identification data is held by the holding means until a prescribed condition is satisfied. be done. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Thus, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to quickly select and set an information group based on one piece of identification data held by the holding means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to the delay in setting the information group.

The game machine B7 is characterized by comprising erasing means for erasing the result of the lottery by the lottery means based on the selection of the identification data 1 by the identification information selection means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the lottery result of the lottery means is erased by the erasing means based on the selection of 1 identification data by the identification information selection means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of the lottery result corresponding to the award of the game from the outside.

In the gaming machine B7, the holding means holds the identification data 1 until a condition for terminating the awarding of the privilege game is satisfied, and the information group selecting means terminates the awarding of the privilege game. A game machine B8 is characterized in that the information group is selected based on the establishment of a condition.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the holding means holds one piece of identification data until the condition for terminating the provision of the privilege game is satisfied. Further, an information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the establishment of a condition for terminating the provision of the privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined lottery result from being held for a relatively long period of time from the start of awarding of the privilege game to the end of awarding of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a predetermined lottery result from the outside while a privilege game is awarded.

A game machine B9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B3 to B8, the identification data has a smaller data amount than the specific number of information constituting the information group.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B8, the identification data has a smaller data amount than the specific number of information constituting the information group, so the specific number of information is stored in the holding means. The amount of data to be held in the holding means can be reduced compared to the case of holding. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the holding means can be reduced.

<Characteristic group C> (Determines whether or not to add the ball on hold depending on whether the most significant bit is 1)
Control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, first storage means storing a plurality of predetermined data, and selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and the control means is selected based on the game second storage means for storing a plurality of set values for setting related to; first selection means for selecting one predetermined data from the first storage means; and predetermined data selected by the first selection means specific information determining means for determining whether or not specific information is included in the one data, and when the specific information determining means determines that the one predetermined data includes the specific information, the one A conversion means for converting predetermined data according to a game situation, and one set value is selected from the second storage means based on the one predetermined data subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means. and second selection means for setting the game machine C1.

According to the game machine C1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored by the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of set values for the control means to set the game are stored by the second storage means. remembered. The first selection means selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and the specific information determination means determines whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information. . When the specific information determining means determines that the one predetermined data contains the specific information, the converting means performs predetermined conversion on the one predetermined data, and the converting means performs the predetermined conversion. One setting value is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means based on the one predetermined data thus obtained.

As a result, it is possible to cause the conversion means to perform different conversions on one predetermined data according to the game situation, so that the second selection means can be made to select different set values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage means, so the capacity of the first storage means can be reduced. has the effect of

In the gaming machine C1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the one predetermined data, the one predetermined data is extracted from the second storage means based on the one predetermined data. A game machine C2 characterized by comprising third selection means for selecting and setting a set value.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the one predetermined data, the third data is generated based on the one predetermined data. Since one setting value is selected and set from the second storage means by the storage means, conversion by the conversion means can be omitted when one predetermined data not containing specific information is selected. . Therefore, there is an effect that processing load can be reduced when specific information is not included in one piece of predetermined data.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is included in the one predetermined data when the highest bit of the one predetermined data is 1. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the highest bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, the predetermined data of 1 includes the specific information by the specific information determining means. Therefore, when determining whether or not specific information is included, there is no need to determine the data specified in bits other than the most significant bit, and determination is performed by simple processing. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the specific information determination means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C3, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance, and When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, the number of times the game ball newly enters with a predetermined value as the upper limit. wherein the converting means sets the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 to 0, and adds the count value of the counting means to the predetermined data of 1. Game machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the game ball entering the ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, and the identification information is dynamically displayed. When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance during this period, the counting means counts the number of new game balls entering with a predetermined value as the upper limit. The most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is set to 0 by the converting means, and the count value of the counting means is added.

Thereby, different setting values can be selected by the second selection means according to the count value of the counting means. Therefore, since various settings can be realized, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine C4, the plurality of setting values stored in the second storage means include at least information regarding the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the plurality of setting values stored in the second storage means include at least the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. Since the information about is included, dynamic display can be performed in the form of dynamic display of various identification information with different display periods. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C5, the second selection means selects from the second storage means the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information with a shorter display time as the count value of the counting means increases. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, the larger the count value of the counting means, the higher the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information with the shorter display time by the second selection means. Since the identification information is selected from the two storage means, it is possible to suppress continuous dynamic display of identification information having a long display time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being continuously greatly disappointed by the long display time and only the performances that are missed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines C1 to C6 is provided with information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the first selection means is based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. A gaming machine C7, characterized in that one predetermined data is selected from the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, random information is obtained by the information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Then, one predetermined data is selected from the first storage means by the first selection means based on the random information obtained by the information obtaining means.

As a result, the predetermined data can be given randomness, so that the set value selected based on the given data can also be given randomness. Therefore, since the game settings are determined at random, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the settings, and there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

<Characteristic group D> (Determine the variation pattern table based on the pattern and the number of rotations)
Dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a combination of a plurality of predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. a privilege game imparting means for imparting a privilege game advantageous to the player when any one of the combinations appears; and executing the dynamic display after the privilege game imparted by the privilege game imparting means is finished. and a number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the means, and the dynamic display execution means counts the number of times counted by the number counting means and the previous A gaming machine D1, wherein the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the information determined when the privilege game is provided.

According to the gaming machine D1, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in advance by the dynamic display execution means. When any one of the determined combinations of identification information appears, a privilege game advantageous to the player is imparted by the privilege game imparting means. The frequency counting means counts the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means after the privilege game imparted by the privilege game imparting means is finished. Based on the number of times counted by the number of times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, the dynamic display execution means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information. be done.

Thus, it is possible to variously determine the mode of dynamic display of the identification information according to the information determined when the last privilege game was awarded and the number of times counted by the number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display executing means stores the number of times counted by the number counting means, specific information based on the identification information that appeared when the previous bonus game was awarded, and the identification information. wherein the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means when the identification information is displayed. D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the number of times counted by the number counting means, the specific information based on the identification information that appeared when the previous privilege game was awarded, and the identification The dynamic display execution means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the information is displayed. A wide variety of aspects of the dynamic display of information can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information relating to the manner of dynamic display of the identification information corresponds to the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means. a plurality of pieces of information forming the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number counting means, and the dynamic display execution means comprises the One information group is selected from the information group storage means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the last privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is used to determine the mode of dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine D3, the information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information regarding the form of dynamic display of the identification information is associated with the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means. It is stored by the information group storage means. A plurality of pieces of information forming the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number counting means. Based on the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, one information group is retrieved from the information group storage means by the dynamic display execution means. It is selected and used to determine the manner in which identification information is dynamically displayed.

Accordingly, the dynamic display executing means can determine the dynamic display mode of the identification information only by selecting the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance, so that the dynamic display mode of the identification information can be determined. There is an effect that the processing load of the determining process can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3 is provided with a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and the dynamic display execution means displays a display on the display means based on the game ball entering the ball entrance. A gaming machine D4 characterized by dynamically displaying identification information.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the dynamic display execution means displays the Since the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, the player can easily trigger the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information only by confirming whether or not the game ball has entered the entrance. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the gaming machine D4, a plurality of the ball entrances are provided, and the dynamic display execution means receives the type of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters and the number of times counted by the number counting means. and information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, and determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information. .

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, a plurality of ball entrances are provided, and the type of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and the privilege Since the dynamic display execution means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the game provision means, the dynamic display of the identification information is A wide variety of aspects can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, after the awarding of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means is completed, a first game state or a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is established. A game state setting means for setting to either game state is provided, and the dynamic display execution means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a specific mode when the game state is the second game state. A gaming machine D6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the awarding of the privilege game by the privilege game imparting means is completed, the game state setting means selects either the first game state or the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. state. When the game state is the second game state, dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific manner by the dynamic display executing means.

As a result, the player can determine whether or not the game state is the second game state by confirming whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific manner. A careful observation can be made about the manner in which the information is displayed dynamically. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D6, the dynamic display executing means can execute the dynamic display of the identification information in the specific mode when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value. A game machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value, the dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display of the identification information in a specific manner. Therefore, the player can be expected to dynamically display the identification information in a specific manner when the count value is a specific value. Therefore, there is an effect that a well-balanced game can be played.

In the gaming machine D7, the dynamic display executing means displays the A gaming machine D8 characterized by executing dynamic display of identification information.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D7, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value and the game state is the first game state, the dynamic display execution means displays a specific mode. Since the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a manner different from the above, it is possible to suppress the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific manner in the first gaming state. Therefore, even though the identification information is dynamically displayed in a specific manner, the second game state that is advantageous to the player does not occur, which may cause the player to distrust the gaming machine and the hall. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the storage.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D8 includes information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on establishment of a specific condition, and the dynamic display execution means receives the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the last privilege game is awarded by the privilege game giving means; A gaming machine D9 characterized by:

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines D1 to D8, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the acquired random information and the number of times are counted. Based on the number of times counted by the means and the information determined when the last privilege game is awarded by the privilege game imparting means, the dynamic display execution means determines the mode of dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, randomness can be imparted to the mode of dynamic display of the determined identification information. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a mode unexpected by the player. There is an effect that it is possible to give unexpectedness to it.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls enter a prize winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through a prize winning opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines such as pachinko machines display a plurality of symbols on a display means such as a liquid crystal display to notify the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole. In such a gaming machine, when a plurality of variably displayed symbols are stop-displayed in a predetermined specific combination, the game shifts to a so-called winning state that is advantageous to the player. In this pattern variation, pattern variation is executed in a wide variety of ways, such as generating a so-called reach state or making a character appear, such as continuing the state of winning a jackpot if one more pattern is aligned for a longer time than usual. By doing so, the expectation of the player is heightened (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-230714).
However, the more diversified the pattern variation patterns are, the more the amount of data to be stored in the game machine increases.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of the storage means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises: control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure; first storage means for storing a plurality of predetermined data; second storage means for storing a plurality of set values for the control means to set a game, selected based on the stored predetermined data; 1 selecting means, specific information determining means for determining whether or not specific information is included in the predetermined data selected by the first selecting means, and the specific information determining means for determining whether or not the specific information is included in the one predetermined data. a converting means for performing a predetermined conversion according to a game situation to said one predetermined data when it is determined that said information includes said one predetermined data; and said one predetermined data subjected to a predetermined conversion by said converting means. and second selection means for selecting and setting one of the set values from the second storage means based on the above.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein when the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is not included in the predetermined data of the above 1, the gaming machine of the above 1 A third selection means is provided for selecting and setting one of the setting values from the second storage means based on predetermined data.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein when the highest bit of the predetermined data of the one is 1, the specific information determining means determines the predetermined data of the one It is determined that the specific information is included.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored by the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of set values for the control means to set the game are stored by the second storage means. remembered. The first selection means selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and the specific information determination means determines whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information. . When the specific information determining means determines that the one predetermined data contains the specific information, the converting means performs predetermined conversion on the one predetermined data, and the converting means performs the predetermined conversion. One setting value is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means based on the one predetermined data thus obtained.
As a result, it is possible to cause the conversion means to perform different conversions on one predetermined data according to the game situation, so that the second selection means can be made to select different set values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage means, so the capacity of the first storage means can be reduced. has the effect of
According to the gaming machine described in technical concept 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical concept 1, when the specific information determining means determines that the predetermined data of 1 does not contain specific information, , one set value is selected from the second storage means and set by the third storage means based on one predetermined data. Conversion by the conversion means can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that processing load can be reduced when specific information is not included in one piece of predetermined data.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, when the highest bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, 1 is determined by the specific information determining means Since it is determined that specific information is included in the predetermined data, data specified in bits other than the most significant bit is determined when determining whether or not the specific information is included. There is no need to do so, and determination can be made with simple processing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the specific information determination means can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 main controller (control means)
202 ROM ( storage means)
202a First winning random number table (storage means)
203 RAM (set value storage means)
S311, S313 Part of data group setting means, address specifying means
Part of S312, S314 data group setting means

Claims (1)

Control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure;
storage means for storing a plurality of data groups each composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data and composed of one or more data for the control means to perform control;
data group setting means for setting data constituting one data group among the plurality of data groups stored in the storage means to be used for predetermined control by the control means;
an address specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined address included in an address range in which at least a specific data group is stored among the plurality of data groups;
The storage means defines first definition information defined in association with the predetermined address, and data number information indicating the number of at least part of data constituting the specific data group in association with data number information. and at least the second stipulated information,
The address identifying means identifies the predetermined address included in the range of addresses in which the specific data group is stored using the first defining information,
The data group setting means uses the predetermined address specified by the address specifying means and the data number information specified using the second specifying information to determine the data constituting the one data group. wherein the number of data indicated by the data number information is set to be used for the predetermined control ,
At least the specific data group has a configuration in which data used for the predetermined control are stored for each of a plurality of consecutive addresses,
The data group setting means sets data stored in a specific number of consecutive addresses indicated by the data number information to be used for the predetermined control as the number of data indicated by the data number information. A game machine characterized by being.

Images